MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

322
Document No.: M-W3998AE-1.0 ANRITSU CORPORATION MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual For safety and warning information, please read this manual before attempting to use the equipment. Keep this manual with the equipment. First Edition

Transcript of MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Page 1: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Document No.: M-W3998AE-1.0

ANRITSU CORPORATION

MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer

Operation Manual

For safety and warning information, please read this manual before attempting to use the equipment. Keep this manual with the equipment.

First Edition

Page 2: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

ii

Safety Symbols To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, Anritsu Corporation uses the following safety symbols to indicate safety-related information. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols BEFORE using the equipment. Some or all of the following symbols may be used on all Anritsu equipment. In addition, there may be other labels attached to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this manual.

Symbols used in manual This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly. This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly. This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-severe injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if proper precautions are not taken.

Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and in Manual The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations to provide information about safety items and operation precautions. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols and take the necessary precautions BEFORE using the equipment.

This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated symbolically in or near the barred circle.

This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is indicated

symbolically in or near the circle. This indicates a warning or caution. The contents are indicated symbolically in or

near the triangle. This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box. These indicate that the marked part should be recycled.

MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual 9 April 2019 (First Edition) Copyright © 2019, ANRITSU CORPORATION. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without the prior written permission of the publisher. The contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice. Printed in Japan

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

Page 3: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

For Safety

iii

DANGER ● When replacing the battery, use the specified battery and insert it with

the correct polarity. If the wrong battery is used, or if the battery is inserted with reversed polarity, there is a risk of explosion causing severe injury or death.

● DO NOT expose batteries to heat or fire. This is dangerous and can

result in explosions or fire. Heating batteries may cause them to leak or explode.

WARNING • ALWAYS refer to the operation manual when working near locations

at which the alert mark shown on the left is attached. If the advice in the operation manual is not followed, there is a risk of personal injury or reduced equipment performance. The alert mark shown on the left may also be used with other marks and descriptions to indicate other dangers.

• Overvoltage Category

This equipment complies with overvoltage category II defined in IEC 61010. DO NOT connect this equipment to the power supply of overvoltage category III or IV.

• Laser radiation warning

• NEVER look directly into the cable connector on the equipment nor into the end of a cable connected to the equipment. There is a risk of injury if laser radiation enters the eye.

• The Laser Safety label is attached to the equipment for safety use as indicated in "Laser Safety" later in this section.

• To ensure that the equipment is grounded, always use the supplied

3-pin power cord, and insert the plug into an outlet with a ground terminal. If power is supplied without grounding the equipment, there is a risk of receiving a severe or fatal electric shock or causing damage to the internal components.

Electric Shock

Replacing Battery

Battery Disposal

Page 4: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

For Safety

iv

WARNING • Only qualified service personnel with a knowledge of electrical fire and

shock hazards should service this equipment. This equipment cannot be repaired by the operator. DO NOT attempt to remove the equipment covers or unit covers or to disassemble internal components. There are high-voltage parts in this equipment presenting a risk of severe injury or fatal electric shock to untrained personnel. In addition, there is a risk of damage to precision components.

• The performance-guarantee seal verifies the integrity of the equipment.

To ensure the continued integrity of the equipment, only Anritsu service personnel, or service personnel of an Anritsu sales representative, should break this seal to repair or calibrate the equipment. Be careful not to break the seal by opening the equipment or unit covers. If the performance-guarantee seal is broken by you or a third party, the performance of the equipment cannot be guaranteed.

• This equipment should always be positioned in the correct manner. If

the cabinet is turned on its side, etc., it will be unstable and may be damaged if it falls over as a result of receiving a slight mechanical shock. Always set up the equipment in a position where the power switch can be reached without difficulty.

• DO NOT short the battery terminals and never attempt to disassemble

the battery or dispose of it in a fire. If the battery is damaged by any of these actions, the battery fluid may leak. This fluid is poisonous. DO NOT touch the battery fluid, ingest it, or get in your eyes. If it is accidentally ingested, spit it out immediately, rinse your mouth with water and seek medical help. If it enters your eyes accidentally, do not rub your eyes, rinse them with clean running water and seek medical help. If the liquid gets on your skin or clothes, wash it off carefully and thoroughly with clean water.

Falling Over

Calibration

Battery Fluid

Repair

Page 5: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

For Safety

v

WARNING • This equipment uses a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). DO NOT subject

the equipment to excessive force or drop it. If the LCD is subjected to strong mechanical shock, it may break and liquid may leak. This liquid is very caustic and poisonous. DO NOT touch it, ingest it, or get in your eyes. If it is ingested accidentally, spit it out immediately, rinse your mouth with water and seek medical help. If it enters your eyes accidentally, do not rub your eyes, rinse them with clean running water and seek medical help. If the liquid gets on your skin or clothes, wash it off carefully and thoroughly with soap and water.

LCD

Page 6: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

For Safety

vi

CAUTION • Always remove the main power cable from the power outlet before

cleaning dust around the power supply and fan. • Clean the power inlet regularly. If dust accumulates around the

power pins, there is a risk of fire. • Keep the cooling fan clean so that the ventilation holes are not

obstructed. If the ventilation is obstructed, the cabinet may overheat and catch fire.

Cleaning

Page 7: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

For Safety

vii

The laser in this equipment is classified as Class 1 according to the IEC 60825-1:2007 standard, or as Class I according to the 21 CFR 1040.10:1995 standard. Class 1 and Class I are defined as below. Class 1: Lasers that are safe under reasonably foreseeable conditions

of operation, including the use of optical instruments for intrabeam viewing.

Class I: Class I levels of laser radiation are not considered to be hazardous.

CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.

Table 1 Laser Safety Classifications Based on IEC 60825-1:2007

Model Name Class

Max. Optical Output Power (mW)*

Pulse Width (s)/ Repetition Rate

Emitted Wavelength (nm)

Beam Divergence (deg.)

Laser Aperture

MS9740B + MS9740B-002

(option) 1 1 CW 1530-1570 11.5 Figure 1,

[1]

*: Indicates the possible optical output power when each and every reasonably foreseeable single-fault condition is included.

Table 2 Specifications of Laser Built into MS9740B

Model Name Max. Optical Output Power (mW)*

Pulse Width (s)/ Repetition Rate

Emitted Wavelength (nm)

Beam Divergence (deg.)

MS9740B + MS9740B-002

(option) 1 CW 1530-1570 11.5

*: Indicates the possible optical output power when each and every reasonably foreseeable single-fault condition is included.

Table 3 Laser Safety Classifications Based on 21 CFR 1040.10:1995

Model Name Class

Max. Optical Output Power (µW) *

Pulse Width (s)/ Repetition Rate

Emitted Wavelength (nm) Laser Aperture

MS9740B + MS9740B-002

(option) I 400 CW 1530-1570 Figure 1, [1]

*: Indicates the possible optical output power during normal operation.

Laser Safety

Page 8: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

For Safety

viii

Table 4 Labels on Product

Type Label Affixed to: Model Name

1 Explanation Figure 1, A MS9740B +

MS9740B-002 (option)

2 Certification Figure 1, B MS9740B +

MS9740B-002 (option)

3 Identification Figure 1, C MS9740B +

MS9740B-002 (option)

Laser Radiation Markings

Figure 1 Locations of Laser Beam Apertures and Affixed Labels

A

B C

[1]

Page 9: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

For Safety

ix

CAUTION This equipment uses a Poly-carbomonofluoride lithium battery to backup the memory. This battery must be replaced by service personnel when it has reached the end of its useful life; contact the Anritsu sales section or your nearest representative.

Note: The battery used in this equipment has a maximum useful life of 4 years. It should be replaced before this period has elapsed.

The equipment is equipped with an internal hard disk from which, as with any hard disk, data may be lost under certain conditions. It is recommended to periodically back up all important data and programs to protect them from being lost accidentally. Anritsu will not be held responsible for lost data. To reduce the possibility of data loss, particular attention should be given to the following points. • The equipment should only be used within the recommend

temperature range, and should not be used in locations where the temperature may fluctuate suddenly.

• Always follow the guidelines to ensure that the equipment is set up in the specified manner.

• Always ensure that the fans at the rear and side of the equipment are not blocked or obstructed in any way.

• Exercise care not to bang or shake the equipment whilst the power is on.

• Never disconnect the mains power at the plug or cut the power at the breaker with the equipment turned on.

The life span of certain parts used in this equipment is determined by the operating time or the power-on time. Due consideration should be given to the life spans of these parts when performing continuous operation over an extended period. The safety of the equipment cannot be guaranteed if component parts are used beyond their life spans. These parts must be replaced at the customer's expense even if within the guaranteed period described in Warranty at the beginning of this manual. For details on life-span, refer to the corresponding section in this manual. This equipment is designed for an industrial environment. In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Replacing Memory Back-up Battery

Hard disk

Lifetime of Parts

Use in a residential environment

Page 10: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

For Safety

x

CAUTION Exposure to corrosive gases such as hydrogen sulfide, sulfurous acid, and hydrogen chloride will cause faults and failures. Note that some organic solvents release corrosive gases.

Use in Corrosive Atmospheres

Page 11: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xi

Equipment Certificate Anritsu Corporation certifies that this equipment was tested before shipment using calibrated measuring instruments with direct traceability to public testing organizations recognized by national research laboratories, including the National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology, and the National Institute of Information and Communications Technology, and was found to meet the published specifications.

Anritsu Warranty Anritsu Corporation will repair this equipment free-of-charge if a malfunction occurs within one year after shipment due to a manufacturing fault. However, software fixes will be made in accordance with the separate Software End-User License Agreement. Moreover, Anritsu Corporation will deem this warranty void when: • The fault is outside the scope of the warranty conditions separately

described in the operation manual. • The fault is due to mishandling, misuse, or unauthorized modification or

repair of the equipment by the customer. • The fault is due to severe usage clearly exceeding normal usage. • The fault is due to improper or insufficient maintenance by the customer. • The fault is due to natural disaster, including fire, wind, flooding,

earthquake, lightning strike, or volcanic ash, etc. • The fault is due to damage caused by acts of destruction, including civil

disturbance, riot, or war, etc. • The fault is due to explosion, accident, or breakdown of any other

machinery, facility, or plant, etc. • The fault is due to use of non-specified peripheral or applied equipment or

parts, or consumables, etc. • The fault is due to use of a non-specified power supply or in a

non-specified installation location. • The fault is due to use in unusual environments(Note). • The fault is due to activities or ingress of living organisms, such as insects,

spiders, fungus, pollen, or seeds. In addition, this warranty is valid only for the original equipment purchaser. It is not transferable if the equipment is resold. Anritsu Corporation shall assume no liability for injury or financial loss of the customer due to the use of or a failure to be able to use this equipment.

Page 12: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xii

Note: For the purpose of this Warranty, "unusual environments" means use: • In places of direct sunlight • In dusty places • Outdoors • In liquids, such as water, oil, or organic solvents, and medical fluids, or

places where these liquids may adhere • In salty air or in place chemically active gases (sulfur dioxide, hydrogen

sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, nitrogen dioxide, or hydrogen chloride etc.) are present

• In places where high-intensity static electric charges or electromagnetic fields are present

• In places where abnormal power voltages (high or low) or instantaneous power failures occur

• In places where condensation occurs • In the presence of lubricating oil mists • In places at an altitude of more than 2,000 m • In the presence of frequent vibration or mechanical shock, such as in cars,

ships, or airplanes

Anritsu Corporation Contact In the event of this equipment malfunctions, contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office. Contact information can be found on the last page of the printed version of this manual, and is available in a separate file on the PDF version.

Page 13: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xiii

Notes On Export Management This product and its manuals may require an Export License/Approval by the Government of the product's country of origin for re-export from your country. Before re-exporting the product or manuals, please contact us to confirm whether they are export-controlled items or not. When you dispose of export-controlled items, the products/manuals need to be broken/shredded so as not to be unlawfully used for military purpose.

Page 14: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xiv

Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol Equipment marked with the Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol complies with council directive 2012/19/EU (the "WEEE Directive") in European Union.

For Products placed on the EU market after August 13, 2005, please contact your local Anritsu representative at the end of the product's useful life to arrange disposal in accordance with your initial contract and the local law.

Page 15: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xv

Software End-User License Agreement (EULA) Please read this Software End-User License Agreement (hereafter this EULA) carefully before using (includes executing, copying, registering, etc.) this software (includes programs, databases, scenarios, etc., used to operate, set, etc., Anritsu electronic equipment). By reading this EULA and using this software, you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of its contents and Anritsu Corporation (hereafter Anritsu) hereby grants you the right to use this Software with the Anritsu-specified equipment (hereafter Equipment) for the purposes set out in this EULA. 1. Grant of License and Limitations

1. Regardless of whether this Software was purchased from or provided free-of-charge by Anritsu, you agree not to rent, lease, lend, or otherwise distribute this Software to third parties and further agree not to disassemble, recompile, reverse engineer, modify, or create derivative works of this Software.

2. You may make one copy of this Software for backup purposes only.

3. You are not permitted to reverse engineer this software.

4. This EULA allows you to install one copy of this Software on one piece of Equipment.

2. Disclaimers To the extent not prohibited by law, in no

event shall Anritsu be liable for personal injury, or any incidental, special, indirect or consequential damages whatsoever, including, without limitation, damages for loss of profits, loss of data, business interruption or any other commercial damages or losses, arising out of or related to your use or inability to use this Software.

3. Limitation of Liability a. If a fault (bug) is discovered in this Software,

preventing operation as described in the operation manual or specifications whether or not the customer uses this software as described in the manual, Anritsu shall at its own discretion, fix the bug, or exchange the software, or suggest a workaround, free-of-charge. However, notwithstanding the above, the following items shall be excluded from repair and warranty.

i) If this Software is deemed to be used for purposes not described in the operation manual or specifications.

ii) If this Software is used in conjunction with other non-Anritsu-approved software.

iii) Recovery of lost or damaged data. iv) If this Software or the Equipment has been

modified, repaired, or otherwise altered without Anritsu's prior approval.

v) For any other reasons out of Anritsu's direct control and responsibility, such as but not limited to, natural disasters, software virus infections, etc.

b. Expenses incurred for transport, hotel, daily allowance, etc., for on-site repairs by Anritsu engineers necessitated by the above faults shall be borne by you.

c. The warranty period for faults listed in article 3a above covered by this EULA shall be either 6 months from the date of purchase of this Software or 30 days after the date of repair, whichever is longer.

Page 16: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xvi

4. Export Restrictions You may not use or otherwise export or

re-export directly or indirectly this Software except as authorized by Japanese and United States law. In particular, this software may not be exported or re-exported (a) into any Japanese or US embargoed countries or (b) to anyone on the Japanese or US Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the US Department of Commerce Denied Persons List or Entity List. By using this Software, you warrant that you are not located in any such country or on any such list. You also agree that you will not use this Software for any purposes prohibited by Japanese and US law, including, without limitation, the development, design and manufacture or production of missiles or nuclear, chemical or biological weapons of mass destruction.

5. Termination Anritsu shall deem this EULA terminated if

you violate any conditions described herein. This EULA shall also be terminated if the conditions herein cannot be continued for any good reason, such as violation of copyrights, patents, or other laws and ordinances.

6. Reparations If Anritsu suffers any loss, financial or

otherwise, due to your violation of the terms of this EULA, Anritsu shall have the right to seek proportional damages from you.

7. Responsibility after Termination Upon termination of this EULA in

accordance with item 5, you shall cease all use of this Software immediately and shall as directed by Anritsu either destroy or return this Software and any backup copies, full or partial, to Anritsu.

8. Dispute Resolution If matters of dispute or items not covered by

this EULA arise, they shall be resolved by negotiations in good faith between you and Anritsu.

9. Court of Jurisdiction This EULA shall be interpreted in

accordance with Japanese law and any disputes that cannot be resolved by negotiation described in Article 8 shall be settled by the Japanese courts.

Page 17: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xvii

Cautions against computer virus infection • Copying files and data Only files that have been provided directly from Anritsu or generated

using Anritsu equipment should be copied to the instrument. All other required files should be transferred by means of USB or

CompactFlash media after undergoing a thorough virus check. • Adding software Do not download or install software that has not been specifically

recommended or licensed by Anritsu. • Network connections Ensure that the network has sufficient anti-virus security protection in

place.

Page 18: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xviii

CE Conformity Marking Anritsu affixes the CE conformity marking on the following product(s) in accordance with the Decision 768/2008/EC to indicate that they conform to the EMC, LVD, and RoHS directive of the European Union (EU).

CE marking

1. Product Model Model: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer

2. Applied Directive EMC: Directive 2014/30/EU LVD: Directive 2014/35/EU RoHS: Directive 2011/65/EU 3. Applied Standards

• EMC: Emission: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Class A) Immunity: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Table 2)

Performance Criteria*

IEC 61000-4-2 (ESD) B IEC 61000-4-3 (EMF) A IEC 61000-4-4 (Burst) B IEC 61000-4-5 (Surge) B IEC 61000-4-6 (CRF) A IEC 61000-4-8 (RPFMF) A IEC 61000-4-11 (V dip/short) B, C

*: Performance Criteria A: The equipment shall continue to operate as intended during and

after the test. No degradation of performance or loss of function is allowed below a performance level specified by the manufacturer, when the equipment is used as intended. The performance level may be replaced by a permissible loss of performance. If the minimum performance level or the permissible performance loss is not specified by the manufacturer, either of these may be derived from the product description and documentation and what the user may reasonably expect from the equipment if used as intended.

Page 19: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xix

B: The equipment shall continue to operate as intended after the test. No degradation of performance or loss of function is allowed below a performance level specified by the manufacturer, when the equipment is used as intended. The performance level may be replaced by a permissible loss of performance. During the test, degradation of performance is however allowed. No change of actual operating state or stored data is allowed. If the minimum performance level or the permissible performance loss is not specified by the manufacturer, either of these may be derived from the product description and documentation and what the user may reasonably expect from the equipment if used as intended.

C: Temporary loss of function is allowed, provided the function is self-recoverable or can be restored by the operation of the controls.

Harmonic current emissions:

EN 61000-3-2: 2014 (Class A equipment) : No limits apply to this equipment with an active input

power under 75 W. • LVD: EN 61010-1: 2010 (Pollution Degree 2) • RoHS: EN 50581: 2012 (Category 9)

Serial number example

If the third digit of the serial number is "7", the product complies with Directive 2011/65/EU as amended by (EU) 2015/863. (Pb,Cd,Cr6+,Hg,PBB,PBDE,DEHP,BBP,DBP,DIBP) If the third digit of the serial number is "6", the product complies with Directive 2011/65/EU. (Pb,Cd,Cr6+,Hg,PBB,PBDE)

Third digit

Page 20: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xx

4. Contact Name: Anritsu GmbH Address, city: Nemetschek Haus, Konrad-Zuse-Platz 1 81829 München, Country: Germany Name: ANRITSU EMEA Ltd. Address, city: 200 Capability Green, Luton Bedfordshire, LU1 3LU Country: United Kingdom

Page 21: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xxi

RCM Conformity Marking Anritsu affixes the RCM mark on the following product(s) in accordance with the regulation to indicate that they conform to the EMC framework of Australia/New Zealand.

RCM marking

1. Product Model

Model: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer 2. Applied Standards

EMC: Emission: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Class A equipment)

Page 22: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

xxii

About Eco label The label shown on the left is attached to Anritsu products meeting our environmental standards. Details about this label and the environmental standards are available on the Anritsu website at https://www.anritsu.com

Page 23: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

I

About This Manual This manual explains the usage precautions, product outline, product layout, panel operations, performance tests, calibration, and maintenance of the MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer (hereafter, MS9740B). For remote control of the MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer via a PC, refer to the MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Remote Control Operation Manual (W3999AE). This manual is configured by the following structures: Chapter 1 through 7 and Appendixes. Read Chapter 1 through 3, Chapter 6 and 7 before using this equipment. For Chapter 4 and 5, read them as needed.

Chapter 1 Outline This chapter explains the outline and main uses of the Optical Spectrum Analyzer and technical terms used in this manual.

Chapter 2 Before Use This chapter explains the setting items, cable connections, character string format controlling the MS9740B, register configuration displaying the MS9740B status, and sync control. It also explains unpacking after purchase, names of each part, and procedures up to power-on.

Chapter 3 Measurement This chapter explains the measurement method using the panel keys.

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions This chapter explains how to set the measurement conditions using the function keys. The analysis function is explained in Chapter 5.

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions The MS9740B has separate functions for measuring laser diodes, optical amplifiers, PMD, etc. This section explains the operation method for each of these functions.

Chapter 6 Setting Operating Environment This chapter explains various MS9740B settings, such as remote control and file saving, as well as how to confirm system information and upgrade firmware.

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance This chapter explains how to calibrate the MS9740B and test performance. It also explains daily maintenance, connector cleaning, storage precautions, etc.

This manual assumes the reader has some basic knowledge about optical communications, handling optical parts, Windows file operations and the Windows Control Panel.

Page 24: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

II

Manual Notation System The MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer is abbreviated MS9740B in this manual.

The names of panel and function keys are in bold. Example: Center, f1 λMkr A:

Page 25: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

1

III

2

3

4

5

6

7

Appendix

Indix

Table of Contents

For Safety ............................................................ iii

About This Manual ................................................. I

Outline ............................................... 1-1 Chapter 11.1 Introduction of Optical Spectrum Analyzer ................... 1-2 1.2 Intended Use .............................................................. 1-6 1.3 Glossary ..................................................................... 1-7

Before Use ......................................... 2-1 Chapter 22.1 Unpacking and Installation .......................................... 2-2 2.2 Part Names ................................................................. 2-5 2.3 Power Connection ....................................................... 2-7 2.4 Connecting Peripheral Devices ................................... 2-9 2.5 Connecting Remote Control Devices ......................... 2-10 2.6 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables ............... 2-11 2.7 Precautions at Measurement..................................... 2-13 2.8 Turning Power On/Off ............................................... 2-17 2.9 Setting Control Panel ................................................ 2-20 2.10 Windows Security Measures ..................................... 2-25 2.11 Configuring Storage Media ........................................ 2-32 2.12 Screen Names .......................................................... 2-33

Measurement..................................... 3-1 Chapter 33.1 Calibrating Before Measurement ................................. 3-2 3.2 Connecting DUT ....................................................... 3-11 3.3 Inputting Data ........................................................... 3-12 3.4 Measurement Types ................................................. 3-13 3.5 Changing Wavelength and Resolution ....................... 3-14 3.6 Setting Level Scale ................................................... 3-15 3.7 Using Markers ........................................................... 3-16 3.8 Saving and Reading Data ......................................... 3-22 3.9 Initializing Measurement Conditions .......................... 3-27 3.10 Releasing Panel Lock ............................................... 3-28

Page 26: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

IV

Changing Measurement Conditions4-1 Chapter 44.1 Wavelength-related Settings ....................................... 4-2 4.2 Setting Level Display................................................... 4-5 4.3 Changing Data Capturing Method ............................... 4-7 4.4 Displaying Level Peaks and Dips .............................. 4-11 4.5 Analyzing Waveform ................................................. 4-13 4.6 Changing Waveform Memory Settings and

Calculation between Memories ................................. 4-23 4.7 Changing Measurement Mode .................................. 4-28 4.8 Inputting Title to Waveform Data ............................... 4-32 4.9 Using Light Source Option ........................................ 4-33

Measurement Functions .................. 5-1 Chapter 55.1 Measuring DFB-LD

(Distributed Feedback Laser Diode) ............................ 5-3 5.2 Measuring FP-LD (Fabry-Perot Laser Diode) .............. 5-7 5.3 Measuring LED (Light Emitting Diode) ....................... 5-10 5.4 Measuring PMD (Polarization Mode Dispersion) ........ 5-13 5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed)

Signals...................................................................... 5-17 5.6 Measuring Laser Diode Modules ............................... 5-33 5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier....................................... 5-47 5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier

(Wavelength Division Multiplex)................................. 5-67 5.9 Measuring WDM Filter .............................................. 5-86

Setting Operating Environment ...... 6-1 Chapter 66.1 Setting and Checking Instrument Data ........................ 6-2 6.2 Managing Files ........................................................... 6-9 6.3 Updating Software .................................................... 6-11

Performance Test and Maintenance7-1 Chapter 77.1 Calibration .................................................................. 7-2 7.2 Performance Test ....................................................... 7-3 7.3 Replacement of Optical Connector .............................. 7-8 7.4 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning .............. 7-10

Page 27: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

V

7.5 Daily Maintenance .................................................... 7-14 7.6 Cautions on Storage MS9740B for Extended Period . 7-15 7.7 Transporting and Disposal ........................................ 7-16 7.8 Troubleshooting ........................................................ 7-17

Appendix A Specifications ............................... A-1

Appendix B Initial Values ................................. B-1

Appendix C Message List ................................. C-1

Appendix D Keyboard and Mouse OperationsD-1

Appendix E Video Band Width and

Sweep Time..................................... E-1

Appendix F Performance Test Result Form .... F-1

Appendix G Excel Macro .................................. G-1

Appendix H Bibliography ................................. H-1 Index ................................................... Index-1

Page 28: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

VI.

Page 29: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

1-1

1 O

utline

Outline Chapter 1

This chapter introduces the optical spectrum analyzer, explains its intended use, and lists technical terms and abbreviations.

1.1 Introduction of Optical Spectrum Analyzer ................... 1-2 1.1.1 Description of Optical Spectrum Analyzer ........ 1-2 1.1.2 Feature ........................................................... 1-4

1.2 Intended Use .............................................................. 1-6 1.3 Glossary ..................................................................... 1-7

Page 30: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 1 Outline

1-2

1.1 Introduction of Optical Spectrum Analyzer 1.1.1 Description of Optical Spectrum Analyzer

The MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer (hereafter, MS9740B) measures the power distribution (spectrum) of optical wavelengths. Figure 1.1.1-1 shows a measurement example.

Figure 1.1.1-1 Measurement Example of Optical Spectrum Analyzer

The horizontal axis indicates the wavelength only. The marker position and analysis result indicate the wavelength or frequency.

The vertical axis indicates the power or relative values. The relative value is the ratio assuming that the measurement value with the maximum power is 100%. The scale can be changed to linear or logarithm.

Page 31: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

1.1 Introduction of Optical Spectrum Analyzer

1-3

1 O

utline

The scale unit is as follows.

Horizontal axis Wavelength nm (nanometer) 1 nm = 10-9 m Frequency THz (terahertz) 1 THz = 1012 Hz Vertical axis Linear scale,

normal value state

W (watt), mW (milliwatt) 1 mW = 10-3 W, µW (microwatt) 1 µW = 10-6 W, nW (nanowatt) 1 nW = 10-9 W, pW (picowatto) 1 pW = 10-12 W

Linear scale, relative value state

% (percentage)

Logarithm scale, normal value state

dBm

Logarithm scale, relative value state

dB (decibel)

The frequency indication of horizontal axis is compatible with the marker location and analysis result.

dBm is an abbreviation for the power ratio in dB of the measured power referenced to 1 mW. The conversion formula of P1 (mW) and P2 (dBm) is as follows.

P2 = 10•log (P1)

dB is the logarithm of the ratio. The conversion formula of R1 (%) and R2 (dB) is as follows.

R2 = 10•log ( R1100 )

The optical wavelength varies with the Index of Refraction n. The relationship between the wavelength in a vacuum λv and in air λa is as follows.

λa = λvn

The horizontal axis can be switched to display wavelength either in a vacuum or in air. For more information, refer to 4.1 “Wavelength-related Settings”.

Page 32: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 1 Outline

1-4

1.1.2 Feature The MS9740B is an optical spectrum analyzer that uses a diffraction grating to analyze the optical spectrum of light in the wavelength range of 600 to 1750 nm. In addition to measuring the spectrum of LDs, LEDs, etc., it also has functions for measuring loss of passive elements, such as optical isolators, and the noise figure and gain of fiber amplifier systems. It adds excellent stability and reliability to the basic functions of a spectrum analyzer and also features improved performance such as high dynamic range, superior Rx sensitivity, fast sweep speed based on Anritsu's long experience in these technologies. The MS9740B is the ideal analyzer for monitoring production of optical parts and optical communications circuits. MS9740B allows setting VBW at 1kHz Fast and at 200 Hz Fast that enable faster sweeps than those by the existing MS9740A. The adoption of Windows improved the data management and interface convenience of MS9740B. In addition to high reliability and excellent basic functions, it also has various applications to support users with faster and more accurate measurements. Basic features: ● Supports both single mode (SM) and multimode (MM) fibers (50/125

µm) Supports also multimode fiber (62.5/125 µm) when MS9740B-009 is installed.

● High-speed measurement with sweep times of 350 ms/30 nm (VBW, 1kHz Fast)

● High wavelength accuracy of ±20 pm (WDM wavelength band, when MS9740B-002 Light Source for Wavelength Calibration is installed)

● Dynamic range of 42 dB (0.2 nm from peak wavelength) and 70 dB (1 nm from peak wavelength) (in High Dynamic Range Mode)

● High resolution of 0.03 nm (1550 nm band) ● Rx Sensitivity of −90 dBm (1 pW) ● Optical input of +23 dBm (200 mW) max.

Page 33: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

1.1 Introduction of Optical Spectrum Analyzer

1-5

1

Ou

tline

Table 1.1.2-1 Abundant Features

Item Function References

Trace Displays up to 10 waveform traces and calculates between waveforms Max. Hold, Min. Hold functions

Refer to 4.6 “Changing Waveform Memory Settings and Calculation between Memories”.

Device Analysis Wavelength analysis and evaluation of optical elements (DFB-LD, FP-LD, LED, LD)

Refer to Chapter 5 “Measurement Functions”.

Wavelength Analysis Center wavelength, spectrum analysis and side mode suppression ratio (SMSR) measurements using RMS, threshold, envelope and ndB Loss methods

Refer to 4.5 “Analyzing Waveform”.

Measurements NF and gain of EDFA, PMD, CW and spectrum of optical elements

Refer to Chapter 5 “Measurement Functions”.

Modulation/Pulse Measurement

1 MHz VBW Refer to 4.7 “Changing Measurement Mode”.

Markers Trace, Delta, Wavelength, Level Zone: Wavelength analysis in specified zone Peak/Dip Search: Search for peak and dip points

Refer to 3.7 “Using Markers”.

Power Monitor Optical power meter function Refer to 4.7 “Changing Measurement Mode”.

Wavelength in Vacuum Display

Displays measured wavelength as value in vacuum

Refer to 4.1 “Wavelength-related Settings”.

External I/F Remote Control: Ethernet, GPIB (option) USB (mouse, keyboard, and memory), VGA monitor out

Refer to 2.9 “Setting Control Panel” and Chapter 6 “Setting Operating Environment”.

Averaging Point averaging (per measured wavelength), Sweep averaging (per sweep), Smoothing

Refer to 4.3 “Changing Data Capturing Method”.

Page 34: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 1 Outline

1-6

1.2 Intended Use The main uses of optical spectrum measurements are listed below: ● Evaluation of optical devices such as laser diodes, optical diodes,

optical transceivers, etc. ● Evaluation of active devices such as optical amplifiers ● Loss evaluation of passive devices such as optical fibers, optical

couplers, optical isolators, optical filters, etc. ● Monitoring signal level and wavelength of communications circuits The standards for public communications, LANs, etc., specify the wavelength to be used. As a result, devices used in these circuits must meet these standards, which requires measurement of the optical spectrum and loss of these devices.

For example, in optical communications using multiplexing of several different wavelengths in one optical fiber (WDM) must be monitored by accurate measurement of the level and wavelength of each part of the multiplexed signal. This is achieved by measuring the optical spectrum in the optical circuit.

The MS9740B has the functions and performance needed to make parts evaluation, WDM communication, and etc. For a detailed explanation of these measurements, refer to Chapter 5 “Measurement Functions”.

Page 35: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

1.3 Glossary

1-7

1 O

utline

1.3 Glossary This section explains the technical terms used in this manual.

External Trigger This function synchronizes measurement of waveform data points with input triggers pulses. It is used when measuring modulated light. For an explanation of the external trigger, refer to 4.7 “Changing Measurement Mode”.

Accuracy Displayed measured values include some errors and the wavelength and level displayed by MS9740B also include errors. The maximum error guaranteed for the MS9740B used under fixed conditions is called the accuracy.

Calibration To minimize errors, the MS9740B has a calibration function that adjusts the internal optical systems using a light source with a known wavelength and level by subtracting the difference between the calibration value and the measured value. For an explanation of calibration, refer to 3.1 “Calibrating Before Measurement” and 7.1. “Calibration”. Sweep Speed Time Sweep time is the time required to start measurement and write the results to the screen. The sweep time of the MS9740B depends on the measurement conditions such as the Rx bandwidth, number of averaging as well as on the waveform shape.

Video Band Width (VBW) VBW (Video Band Width) is the bandwidth of the internal received amplifier. Narrowing the VBW helps suppress noise in measurements.

Page 36: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 1 Outline

1-8

Figure 1.3-1 Example of Measurement at VBW 1 MHz

Figure 1.3-2 Example of Measurement at VBW 10kHz

Page 37: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

1.3 Glossary

1-9

1 O

utline

Figure 1.3-3 Example of Measurement at VBW 100Hz

When measuring intense modulated light using an external trigger, set the value of VBW to a higher value than the modulation signal. If the VBW value is lower than the modulation frequency, the level is not measured accurately.

Measured Level Range The measured level range is the maximum and minimum levels that the analyzer can measure. It depends on the wavelength due to the characteristics of the analyzer's internal optical systems. In addition, the minimum level is very much impacted by internal electrical noise. A narrow VBW and smoothing/ averaging processing reduce the impact of this noise.

Page 38: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 1 Outline

1-10

Dynamic Range Near the wavelengths of input lights, the detectable level is limited by the effect of the lights. Dynamic range is the ratio between the maximum level of this input optical spectrum and the detectable optical level. Figure 1.3-4 shows the definition of dynamic range.

Figure 1.3-4 Definition of Dynamic Range

Waveform Analysis This is a function for analyzing and displaying measured waveform data. The center wavelength and spectrum half width measurement are given as an example of waveform analysis. Refer to 4.5 “Analyzing Waveform” for an explanation of this measurement analysis function.

Waveform Calculation This is a function for calculating between two waveforms. It is used to measure loss characteristics of optical parts. Refer to 4.6 “Changing Waveform Memory Settings and Calculation between Memories” for an explanation of this function.

1520.5 nm 0.5 nm/Div 1523 nm In Air 1525.5 nm –60.0 dBm

Dynamic range

–10.0 dBm

10.0 dB/ Div

0.0 dBm

REF

Page 39: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

1.3 Glossary

1-11

1 O

utline

Wavelength Resolution Wavelength resolution (Res) is the ability to separate two adjacent optical wavelengths. Figure 1.3-5 thru Figure 1.3-7 show the changes in half-width when changing the resolution, if measuring a light source with a narrow spectrum such as a laser. The resolution must be set depending on the required measurement wavelength resolution. The actual resolution displayed on the screen is determined by integrating the levels of the optical spectrum of single wavelength light source with sufficiently narrow linewidth compared with resolution of the MS9740B and dividing by the peak level. The values used in the calculation are the defaults values at factory shipment or the values measured by executing resolution calibration. For the resolution calibration method, refer to 3.1 “Calibrating Before Measurement”.

Figure 1.3-5 Measurement Example of Resolution 0.1 nm

Figure 1.3-6 Measurement Example of Resolution 0.5 nm

1550 nm 0.2 nm/Div 1551 nm In Air 1552 nm 0

Half-width 0.095 nm

100 µW

50 µW

Res 0.1 nm

REF

Setting resolution

1550 nm 0.2 nm/Div 1551 nm In Air 1552 nm 0

100 µW

50 µW

Res 0.5 nm

REF

Half width 0.505 nm Setting resolution

Page 40: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 1 Outline

1-12

Figure 1.3-7 Measurement Example of Resolution 1.0 nm

Remote Control This is a function for sending commands from a PC to the MS9740B via the Ethernet or GPIB (Option) interface to change the measurement conditions and to send the measurement results from the MS9740B to the PC. Refer to MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Remote Control Operation Manual for details of the remote control function. Monochrometer This is a device for splitting the light into each wavelength. The MS9740B uses a diffraction grating as a device to split light.

1550 nm 0.2 nm/Div 1551 nm In Air 1552 nm 0

100 µW

50 µW

Res 1.0 nm

REF

Half width 0.102 nm Setting resolution

Page 41: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

1.3 Glossary

1-13

1 O

utline

The abbreviations used in this manual and on the analyzer panels and screens are listed in Table 1.3-1.

Table 1.3-1 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Formal Name Act-Res Actual Resolution Align Alignment Amp Amplifier APC Angled Physical Contact ASE Amplified Spontaneous Emission Att Attenuator Avg Average BPF Band Pass Filter BS Back Space BW Band Width Cal Calibration Cal Calculate CFR Code of Federal Regulation Config Configuration CSV Comma Separated Value CW Continuous Wave D.Range Dynamic Range Dens Density DFB-LD Distribution Feedback Laser Diode Diff Difference Div, div Division DUT Device under test Ext External FP-LD Fabry-Perot Laser Diode Freq, Frq Frequency FWHM Full Width at Half Maximum GI Graded Index GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus IEC International Electrotechnical Commission Info Information Init Initialize Int Internal Intvl Interval ITU International Telecommunication Union LD Laser Diode LED Light Emitting Diode Lvl Level

Page 42: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 1 Outline

1-14.

Table 1.3-1 Abbreviation (Cont'd)

Abbreviation Formal Name LMker Level Marker Log Logarithm Max Maximum Min Minimum Mkr Marker Mode Cpl Mode Coupling NF Noise Figure No Number Opt Optical OSNR Optical Signal to Noise Ratio Ovl Overlap PC Physical Contact Pk Peak PLZN Polarization PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion Pol Polarizer POLY Polynomial equation Pow Power Prmtr Parameter pt Points PtAvg Point Average Ref Reference Res Resolution RMS Root Mean Square S.Lvl Slice Level SM Single Mode Smplg Sampling SMSR Side Mode Suppression Ratio SNR Signal to Noise Ratio SwpAvg Sweep Average TMkr Trace Marker Trig Trigger Uncal Un-calibrated USB Universal Serial Bus Vac Vacuum VBW Video Band Width WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing Wl Wavelength XML Extended Markup Language Wri Write

Page 43: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2-1

2 Before U

se

Before Use Chapter 2

This chapter describes the procedures from how to unpack the package through how to turn on the power, basic information about parameter and screen names, and function configurations.

2.1 Unpacking and Installation .......................................... 2-2 2.1.1 Unpacking ....................................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Installation....................................................... 2-3

2.2 Part Names ................................................................. 2-5 2.2.1 Front Panel ..................................................... 2-5 2.2.2 Rear Panel ...................................................... 2-6

2.3 Power Connection ....................................................... 2-7 2.3.1 Power Requirements ....................................... 2-7 2.3.2 Connecting Power Cord .................................. 2-8

2.4 Connecting Peripheral Devices ................................... 2-9 2.5 Connecting Remote Control Devices ......................... 2-10 2.6 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables ............... 2-11 2.7 Precautions at Measurement..................................... 2-13 2.8 Turning Power On/Off ............................................... 2-17

2.8.1 Power-on ...................................................... 2-17 2.8.2 Power-off ...................................................... 2-18

2.9 Setting Control Panel ................................................ 2-20 2.9.1 Displaying Windows Desktop ........................ 2-20 2.9.2 Confirming Windows Version......................... 2-21 2.9.3 Setting Control Panel .................................... 2-22 2.9.4 Using external display ................................... 2-23

2.10 Windows Security Measures ..................................... 2-25 2.10.1 Installing Windows Important Update

Programs (Windows Update)......................... 2-26 2.10.2 Using Antivirus Software ............................... 2-28 2.10.3 Restoring Hard Disk Drive ............................. 2-29

2.11 Configuring Storage Media ........................................ 2-32 2.12 Screen Names .......................................................... 2-33

Page 44: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-2

2.1 Unpacking and Installation 2.1.1 Unpacking

Table 2.1.1-1 lists the standard configurations of the MS9740B. At unpacking, check that all items are included. Contact your Anritsu Service and Sales Office or agent if any parts are missing or damaged.

Table 2.1.1-1 Standard Configurations

Item Model Product Name Q'ty Remarks Main unit MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer 1 Accessories

Z2024A Power Cord (2.6 m) MS9740B Operation Manual (CD)* TAA-1CT140003 Microsoft Software License Terms (WES7)

1 1 1

Packed in Accessory Box

*: The CD includes two MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manuals: Mainframe and Remote Control.

Options for the MS9740B listed in Table 2.1.1-2 are provided. Select one, as you need. The MS9740B might be returned to Anritsu Service and Sales Office for installing some options. For the specifications, refer to Appendix A “Specifications”.

Table 2.1.1-2 Options

Model Name Remarks MS9740B-001 MS9740B-101*1

MS9740B-201*2

GPIB Interface Interface used at remote control Controls MS9740B via GPIB connector on rear-panel

MS9740B-002 MS9740B-102*1 MS9740B-202*2

Light Source for Waveform Calibration

Light source for wavelength calibration Calibrates wavelength to within ±20 pm

MS9740B-037 MS9740B-038 MS9740B-039 MS9740B-040

FC ST DIN SC

Standard option 037 All available as PC types (spherical polishing)

*1: Must be returned to Anritsu (Japan) when installing. *2: Must be returned to an Anritsu Service and Sales office when

installing. The option number of the added option is indicated on the label on the rear panel.

Page 45: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.1 Unpacking and Installation

2-3

2 Before U

se

2.1.2 Installation Install the MS9740B horizontally as shown in Figure 2.1.2-1.

Figure 2.1.2-1 Installation Orientation

CAUTION If the MS9740B is not installed in a “good” direction as above, a small shock may turn it over and harm the user.

Good Installation method

Page 46: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-4

A fan is installed in the MS9740B to prevent the internal temperature from rising. Place the MS9740B in a location with the vents at least 10 cm away from walls, peripherals or other obstructions so as not to block the fan perimeter.

Figure 2.1.2-2 Distance from Surrounding Objects

Although the MS9740B operates at an ambient temperature of 5 to 45°C, avoid using it in locations, such as the following, since it may cause failures.

● Locations with strong vibrations ● Humid and dusty locations ● Locations with direct sunlight ● Locations where there is the risk of exposure to active gases ● Locations where power voltage severely fluctuates ● Locations where there is a risk of equipment toppling over, etc.

At least 10 cm

At least 10 cm

At least 10 cm

Page 47: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.2 Part Names

2-5

2 Before U

se

2.2 Part Names 2.2.1 Front Panel

Figure 2.2.1-1 Front Panel

Panel keys can also be operated from the keyboard. Refer to Appendix D “Keyboard and Mouse Operations”.

Local key Preset key

Recall key

Horizontal function key (F1 to F8)

Enter key Save key Cancel key

USB connector

Vertical function key (f1 to f8)

Optical input connector

Optical output connector

Power switch

Hard disk lamp

Power lamp

Shortcut key

Measurement key

Auto Measure key

Rotary knob

Arrow key

Display

Numeric input key

Copy key

Center Span Res

Ref VBW

Center

Ref Lvl

Marker Select

Zone Marker

Peak Search

Single Repeat Stop

Auto Measure

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0 . —

BS

Page 48: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-6

When using the optical input/output connector, open the optical connector cover as shown.

Figure 2.2.1-2 How to Opening the Optical Connector Cover

2.2.2 Rear Panel

Figure 2.2.2-1 Rear Panel

Inlet

Serial USB

GPIB Trigger input

Mic input

Line output

Ethernet

Line input

Monitor output

Not used Serial Number, Option Number Lable

Page 49: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.3 Power Connection

2-7

2 Before U

se

2.3 Power Connection This section describes the procedures for supplying power.

For your safety, read the following operating procedures before turning on the MS9740B.

2.3.1 Power Requirements For normal operation of the MS9740B, use the power voltage range described below.

Power source Voltage range Frequency 100 Vac system 100 to 120 V 50 to 60 Hz 200 Vac system 200 to 240 V 50 to 60 Hz

Switching between 100 and 200 V systems is automatic.

CAUTION Supplying power exceeding the above range may result in electrical shock, fire, failure, or malfunction.

Page 50: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-8

2.3.2 Connecting Power Cord Insert the power plug into an outlet, and connect the other end to the power inlet on the rear panel. To ensure that the instrument is earthed, always use the supplied 3-pin power cord, and insert the plug into an outlet with an earth terminal.

WARNING Always connect the instrument to a properly grounded outlet. Do not use the instrument with an extension cord or transformer that does not have a ground wire.

If the instrument is connected to an ungrounded outlet, there is a risk of receiving a fatal electric shock. In addition, the peripheral devices connected to the instrument may be damaged.

CAUTION If an emergency arises causing the instrument to fail or malfunction, disconnect the instrument from the power supply by disconnecting either end of the power cord.

When installing the instrument, arrange the power inlet and outlet so that an operator may easily connect or disconnect the power cord.

If the instrument is mounted in a rack, a power switch for the rack or a circuit breaker may be used for power disconnection.

Page 51: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.4 Connecting Peripheral Devices

2-9

2 Before U

se

2.4 Connecting Peripheral Devices USB devices USB devices such as mouse, keyboard, storage, etc., can be connected to the front-panel and rear-panel USB connector.

No panel operations are required before removing USB devices from the MS9740B. USB devices can be removed at any time as long as no files are being written to or read from the USB device. External Monitor Connect a monitor output to the rear-panel. The supported monitor resolutions are 800 × 600. Ethernet Connect a category-5 or better crossover cable. Serial Serial devices are not supported. Mic input/Line input/Line output Headsets and audio recording devices cannot be used with the MS9740B. GPIB The GPIB devices such as a printer or plotter are not controlled via the MS9740B.

Page 52: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-10

2.5 Connecting Remote Control Devices Ethernet Connect the Ethernet cable to the rear-panel left Ethernet connector. Do not use the right Ethernet connector. Use a category-5 or better crossover cable. GPIB GPIB can be used when the MS9740B-001/101 is installed. Connect the cable to the rear-panel GPIB connector. Note:

The MS9740B cannot print directly to a printer with a GPIB interface.

Page 53: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.6 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables

2-11

2 Before U

se

2.6 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables Optical fiber cables may degrade in performance or be damaged if handled improperly.

Note the following points when handling them.

CAUTION Do not pull the cable when removing the connector.

Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable, or remove the cable sheath from the optical connector.

CAUTION Do not excessively bend, fold, or pinch an optical fiber cable.

Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable. Keep the bend radius of an optical fiber cable at 30 mm or more. If the radius is less, optical fiber cable loss will increase.

Page 54: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-12

CAUTION Do not excessively pull on or twist an optical fiber cable.

Also, do not hang anything by using a cable. Doing so may break the optical fiber inside the cable.

CAUTION Be careful not to hit the end of an optical connector against anything hard such as the floor or a desk by dropping the optical fiber cable.

Doing so may damage the connector end and increase connection loss.

WARNING Do not touch the end of a broken optical fiber cable.

The broken optical fiber may pierce the skin, causing injury.

CAUTION Do not disassemble optical connectors.

Doing so may cause part to break or the performance to degrade.

Page 55: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.7 Precautions at Measurement

2-13

2 Before U

se

2.7 Precautions at Measurement

CAUTION Never input an optical signal with a level that exceeds the maximum input level of the analyzer. Input of an over-level signal runs the risk of damaging the optical parts and level error will increase due to degraded level linearity.

Effect of Optical Fiber on Measurement Results

The following optical fibers can be used with MS9740B: ● Single-mode fiber (SM) (core diameter of 5 to 9.5 µm) ● Multimode fiber (GI) (core diameter of 50 µm) When using SM fiber, press F1 Measure Mode and set f5 MM Mode to Off. When using GI fiber, press F1 Measure Mode and set f5 MM Mode to On. The performance is limited as follows, depending on the fiber used. (1) Limitations on wavelength resolution

The MS9740B wavelength resolution accuracy meets the specifications using SM fiber with a core diameter of 9.5 µm or less. If a fiber with a core diameter of more than 9.5 µm is used, the specified resolution accuracy may not be met.

(2) Limitations on measurement level There are limitations depending on the Numerical Aperture (NA) of

the optical input fiber. The MS9740B has a built-in monochromater.

When connecting an SM optical fiber with an NA larger than 9.5/125 µm, not all the light radiated from the fiber is captured by the MS9740B, causing connection loss equivalent to the lost amount of light. As a result, the measured level is smaller than the true level. The NA of multimode fiber is about 0.2 to 0.35 larger than the NA of SM fiber, causing error when measuring level using multimode fiber.

Page 56: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-14

Figure 2.7-1 Difference in light radiated from optical fibers

Effect of Water Vapor on Spectrum Absorption Water vapor (OH radicals) in air have multiple absorption spectra around 1350 to 1450 nm. If there is water vapor in the MS9740B, ripple will be observed in the measured spectrum due to the water vapor absorption spectra. The size of the ripple changes with humidity. If the measurement results are being impacted by water vapor absorption spectra, use the MS9740B in a low-humidity/dry environment.

Figure 2.7-2 Water Vapor Absorption Spectrum

SM Fiber

GI Fiber

NA 0.1

NA 0.2 Loss part at input to main frame

Part measured by main frame

Loss

(dB)

Wavelength (nm)

Page 57: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.7 Precautions at Measurement

2-15

2 Before U

se

Effect of Secondary Refraction on Measurement Results The MS9740B uses a diffraction grating that outputs wavelengths simultaneously as integer fractions. The diffraction grating outputs a ghost harmonic wavelength at a position of twice the wavelength of the measured wavelength. The following figure shows an example of ghosting at the two times (1265 nm) the wavelength of a measured He-Ne laser (632.8 nm). This ghost does not actually exist in the wavelength spectrum.

Figure 2.7-3 Ghosting Example

When measuring wavelengths of 900 nm of less, take care about ghosts at the two times the wavelength of a measured result.

He-Ne laser spectrum

Ghost

Page 58: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-16

Using Multimode (MM) fiber (50 µm core diameter) There are two insertion methods for multimode fiber: 1. Steady state mode excitation when light from an LED or VCSEL is propagated, and 2. Fixed mode excitation when using an excited fiber (GSGG) for measuring optical loss of an LD. To measure light in these excitation states, press F1 Measure Mode and set f5 MM Mode to “On”.

When setting f5 MM Mode to On for the following measurements: ● When measuring faceted light sources such as LEDs, VCSELs, etc. ● When measuring in the recommended launch mode using a dummy

fiber patch cord (GSGG) When setting f5 MM Mode to Off: To measure light in the limited excitation states, press F1 Measure Mode and set f5 MM Mode to “Off”. ● When measuring optical output of LD modules without normal

distribution (excitation) using dummy fiber patch cord for optical loss measurement (GSGG etc.)

Note:

The GSGG is a device with a fixed multimode fiber excitation condition. It is configured using a combination of different multimode fibers.

The 14 dB loss when connecting 50 µm/125 µm multimode optical fiber degrades the light reception sensitivity. The MS9740B has an MM mode function to correct loss when connecting 50 µm/125 µm multimode optical fiber and to display the level. The optical loss level is corrected when the MM mode is On. It corrects the level by 14 dB (sum). However, level display errors occur if loss is not 14 dB according to the excitation conditions of multimode fiber.

Page 59: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.8 Turning Power On/Off

2-17

2 Before U

se

2.8 Turning Power On/Off 2.8.1 Power-on

1. Connect the power cord plug, referring to 2.3 “Power Connection”. The MS9740B enters the standby state and the power switch lamp lights orange.

2. Press the power switch. The power lamp lights green and the Windows start-up begins.

3. After 1 minute has passed, the MS9740B start-up screen is displayed.

Notes: ● Do not press the power switch while the start-up screen is

displayed, otherwise the MS9740B software may not start normally. The time required for startup may be longer at low temperatures.

● After powering off the MS9740B, wait for at least 2 seconds before powering on again. Otherwise, the MS9740B may not boot normally.

Page 60: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-18

2.8.2 Power-off Power-off using panel keys Press the Power switch to close applications and start shutdown. The green Power switch lamp goes off, the power lamp lights orange, and the power is turned off.

Notes: ● Do not press the Power switch for more than 4 seconds except

where forced shutdown performed, otherwise the system will quit immediately.

● To turn Off MS9740B when it is remote-controlled, stop the remote control operation. Then press the Local key and press the power button to turn it Off.

● If the power button is pressed while MS9740B is remote-controlled, a message appears on the screen to prompt you to close the program. To turn Off the power forcibly, select Force shut down by the left arrow key and press Enter. Then select Yes by the left arrow key and press Enter to start shutting down.

Power-off using mouse connected to MS9740B 1. Connect the supplied mouse to the MS9740B and click the “Minimize”

button located in the upper right corner of the application window of the MS9740B.

2. Open the Start menu on the Windows task bar. 3. Click Shut down.

Shutdown begins, the green Power switch lamp goes off, the power lamp lights orange.

Forced shutdown Press the Power switch for 4 seconds or more. The green Power switch lamp goes off, the power lamp lights orange, and the power is turned off.

“Minimize” button

Page 61: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.8 Turning Power On/Off

2-19

2 Before U

se

Notes: ● Only use forced shutdown as an emergency operation when key,

mouse, and keyboard operations fail. A fault may have occurred if the power cannot be turned off even by pressing the Power switch for 4 or more seconds. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and contact your Anritsu Service and Sales Office or agent.

● Unplugging the power plug while the hard disk is being accessed may cause failure of the hard disk. Unplug the power plug when the power is off.

Page 62: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-20

2.9 Setting Control Panel The MS9740B is set to the factory defaults for optimal measurement. Changing the Windows settings is outside the scope of operation warranty. In addition, the performance may drop or functions may not operate correctly if the Windows settings are changed. Read the general notes in this section carefully when changes to the Windows settings are required.

CAUTION MS9740B is guaranteed to operate properly only with factory defaults.

Proper operation is not guaranteed if there are any changes to Windows settings, or if a program not guaranteed by Anritsu is installed.

Any changes to the registry can cause MS9740B to behave abnormally.

2.9.1 Displaying Windows Desktop Connect a mouse and a keyboard to operate Windows. Use the accessory USB mouse and a compatible USB keyboard.

Display the Windows Desktop as described below. To display applications of the MS9740B again, press the application switch or select an application in the Windows Taskbar.

Mouse Click the Minimize button at the top right corner of the application window of the MS9740B. Minimizing all applications displays the Desktop.

Keyboard Press the Windows key and D key to minimize all windows and display the Windows Desktop.

Page 63: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.9 Setting Control Panel

2-21

2 Before U

se

2.9.2 Confirming Windows Version The MS9740B uses Windows Embedded Standard 7 (hereinafter, referred to as “Windows”) as the operating system. Settings for Windows and the system can be operated by connecting a mouse and a keyboard.

This section describes how to perform operations on Windows installed to the MS9740B and general notes.

Note: The setting method varies depending on the CPU. Check your CPU and operating system as below before starting the Windows setting.

How to check your CPU and operating system Connect the mouse to MS9740B and perform the steps below. 1. Click the Start menu on the Windows taskbar. 2. Right-click on My Computer or Computer to display the menu and

select Properties. 3. Find out the operating system from the window design and the

Processor and System type displayed.

Figure 2.9.2-1 Windows Embedded Standard 7

Processor: CPU N455 @ 1.66 GHz System type: 32-bit Operating System

Page 64: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-22

2.9.3 Setting Control Panel Various Windows settings (such as time, network address, and external display) are configured at the Control Panel. Do not change any settings except those listed in Table 2.9.3-1.

When using the mouse: 1 Open the Start menu on the Windows task bar. 2 Select Control Panel to display the control panel. When using the keyboard: 1 Press the Windows key to display the start menu. 2 Press C key to display the control panel.

Table 2.9.3-1 Description of Control Panel (Windows Embedded Standard 7)

Setting Type Description

Date and Time ● Change the date, time and time zone as necessary. ● Internet Time is set to off at factory shipment. Operation may

be affected if this setting is changed.

Display Intel® GMA Driver for Mobile ● This setting must be changed when connecting an external

monitor to the MS9740B VGA connector. See Section 2.9.4 "Using external display" for details.

● Changing the screen resolution, refresh rate or power management, or enabling the screen saver may cause abnormal MS9740B operation.

Network and Sharing Center ● TCP/IP settings may change when the MS9740B is

remote-controlled via the Ethernet. Refer to the MS9740B Operation Manual (Mainframe Remote Control) for details.

● The IP address uses 192.168.0.10 at factory shipment. Ensure that the network settings are appropriate when connecting the MS9740B to a network.

Page 65: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.9 Setting Control Panel

2-23

2 Before U

se

2.9.4 Using external display An external display can be connected to the VGA connector on the back of the MS9740B to display multiple screens. This operation is described below.

Figure 2.9.4-1 External Display Setting

1. Connect the display to the VGA connector. 2. Display the Intel® GMA Driver Settings screen using any of the

following methods. ● Execute “Intel® GMA Driver for Mobile" from the Windows

Control Panel. ● Press Ctrl + Alt + F12 on the keyboard.

3. Change the Display Devices settings as shown below: ● Multiple Displays Twin or Intel® Dual Display Clone ● Primary Device Notebook (MS9740B display) ● Secondary Device Monitor

Do not select the Monitor of Single Display. When Twin is set, the analyzer and external screens are displayed at the same settings. When Dual Display Clone is set, the refresh rate, aspect ratio, color calibration, etc., can be set separately for the screens.

Page 66: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-24

Notes: ● Turning the MS9740B power on with an external display not

connected to the VGA connector only initializes the main display.

● When using an external display, keep the external monitor connected.

● Do not change the resolution, refresh rate and power management settings for the main screen.

● The supported monitor resolutions are 800 × 600.

Page 67: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.10 Windows Security Measures

2-25

2 Before U

se

2.10 Windows Security Measures MS9740B uses Windows Embedded Standard 7 (WES7) 32bit version.

When connecting the MS9740B to a network, in addition to connecting to secure and virus-protected networks, the following procedures are recommended in order to add protection against malware (malicious software) and viruses.

● Activating firewall ● Installing Windows important update programs ● Using antivirus software The security measure settings condition of MS9740B can be confirmed from the Control Panel of Windows.

1. Click the “Minimize” button located in the upper right corner of the application window to show the Windows desktop.

2. Click Start → Control Panel from the Windows menu bar hidden in the lower part of the screen.

3. Click System and Security → Action Center. 4. Click Security, and confirm security measures settings condition. Note:

Security warnings are not displayed by factory default.

CAUTION When connecting MS9740B to the Internet or to an external network, there is a possibility an unpredictable problem or damage may occur. Anritsu Corporation does not recompense for any damage caused by connecting MS9740B to a network.

Page 68: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-26

2.10.1 Installing Windows Important Update Programs (Windows Update)

It is necessary to regularly check for important Windows update programs and keep them up-to-date. However, since executing update program downloads and installations will decrease the performance of MS9740B, deactivate automatic updates for Windows Update. Instead, it is recommended to check for new updates, execute downloads and installations periodically when MS9740B is not in use for measurement.

Windows Update setting and execution: 1. Minimize the MS9740B screen using a mouse to show the Windows

desktop. 2. Click Start → Control Panel from the Windows menu bar hidden in

the lower part of the screen. 3. Click System and Security → Windows Update to show Windows

Update display. 4. To deactivate automatic updates, click Change settings found in left

side of Windows Update display.

Figure 2.10.1-1 Windows Update display

Page 69: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.10 Windows Security Measures

2-27

2 Before U

se

5. Select Never check for updates (not recommended) in Important updates, then click OK.

Figure 2.10.1-2 Change settings display

6. To check for newly available update programs (manual update), click Check for updates in Windows Update display.

Figure 2.10.1-3 Windows Update display (manual update)

7. When a new update program is found, download and install following the displayed instructions.

Page 70: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-28

2.10.2 Using Antivirus Software It is recommended to install antivirus software on MS9740B. However, since the automatic updates for virus data library and the full scans run in the background by the antivirus software will decrease the performance of MS9740B, do not execute them. Instead, it is recommended to run them periodically when MS9740B is not in use for measurement. The antivirus software that checked operation in MS9740B is shown below.

● McAfee Endpoint Security 10.6 Notes:

● Refer to the antivirus software operation manual for its installation and operation procedures. It is confirmed that no negative effects in the general usage of MS9740B are caused by using the software mentioned above, however, we do not guarantee the behavior of all functions of this antivirus software and other software containing similar functions.

● When activate firewall, configure the access authorization for the following files.

C:\Program Files\Anritsu Corporation\Signal Analyzer\Applications\AppMgr.exe

C:\Program Files\Anritsu Corporation\Signal Analyzer\Applications\OsaAppPlatform.exe

Page 71: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.10 Windows Security Measures

2-29

2 Before U

se

2.10.3 Restoring Hard Disk Drive When restoring the hard disk drive, the software installed on MS9740B is also restored to early state. Download the latest version of the software from the Anritsu website, and install it. For details on how to install the software, refer to 6.3 “Updating Software”.

Perform the following steps to restore the hard disk drive.

1. Disconnect the MS9740B from the network if connected. 2. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the mainframe, and then turn

the MS9740B power On. 3. After the following screen appears, press F8 on the keyboard every 1

second repeatedly.

The following screen will appear.

4. Use the keyboard cursor keys to select Repair Your Computer, and then press Enter.

Page 72: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-30

5. Click Next.

6. Click OK. Leave the Password box blank.

7. Click Reinstall Windows.

Page 73: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.10 Windows Security Measures

2-31

2 Before U

se

8. Click Yes.

The Recovery Processing window in Windows is displayed. The recovery processing requires 10 to 30 minutes. After Windows restarts several times, the application window of the MS9740B will appear.

9. Click the “Minimize” button located in the upper right corner of the application window.

10. In Windows Explorer, open the following folder. C:\Program Files\Anritsu\MS9740A\PreSetup 11. Right-click “Recovery.bat” to select run as administrator. 12. After Windows restarts, the application window of MS9740B will

appear. Click the “Minimize” button located in the upper right corner of the application window.

13. In Windows Explorer, confirm that the following folder is deleted. If the folder has not been deleted yet, repeat steps 10 through 12.

C:\Windows.old 14 Update Windows according to the procedure in 2.10.1 “Installing

Windows Important Update Programs (Windows Update)”.

“Minimize” button

Page 74: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-32

2.11 Configuring Storage Media The MS9740B has a built-in hard disk for storing the operating system, application software, user data, etc.

The MS9740B hard disk is partitioned as follows: Volume C: System Partition The following files are saved: ● Windows ● Application software

● File required for operation The MS9740B may not operate normally if data required for operations are changed or deleted. Normally, do not change data on this volume. Volume D: Data Partition This volume is used mainly as the file input and output destination for the waveform data and measurement environment of the MS9740B application software.

The analyzer files are saved to D:\Anritsu Corporation\Optical Spectrum Analyzer\User Data. This file is created when pressing the f4 Save CSV or f5 Save XML button. For the operating procedures, refer to 3.8.1 “Saving Measurement Conditions and Waveform Data”. Note the following when operating the MS9740B: ● Do not change the partition configuration. The MS9740B may not

operate normally. ● Do not format the hard disk.

Page 75: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.12 Screen Names

2-33

2 Before U

se

2.12 Screen Names

Figure 2.12-1 Measurement Screen

Level scale

Wavelength

Graph

Vertical function key

Horizontal function key

Trace

Reference level

Marker Measurement condition field

Message field

Date/time

Page 76: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-34

Figure 2.12-2 Names of Trace and Marker

Trace marker

Sweep marker

Wavelength marker A

Wavelength marker B

Level marker D Level marker C

Delta marker

Zone marker

Trace

Page 77: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

2.12 Screen Names

2-35

2 Before U

se

Figure 2.12-3 Marker, Level Scale, Wavelength Displays

Figure 2.12-4 Measurement Condition Setting Display Field

Figure 2.12-5 Trace Display

Level scale

Reference level

Wavelength scale

Start wavelength

Wavelength in air / Wavelength in vacuum

Center wavelength

Stop wavelength

Value of wavelength marker Wavelength marker wavelength difference

Trace marker/Delta marker value Level Marker Value Level Marker

Level Difference

Resolution Measurement point count

Sweep averaging count Point averaging count

Smoothing point count

VBW Meas Time Interval

High Dynamic Range Mode External trigger

Actual resolution

Trace name A Wri Max

Trace type

Active trace display Storage Mode or Calculating formula

Page 78: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 2 Before Use

2-36.

Page 79: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3-1

3 M

easurement

Measurement Chapter 3

This chapter explains how to measure using shortcut and measurement keys, save and read measurement results, and initialize measurement conditions.

3.1 Calibrating Before Measurement .................................. 3-2 3.1.1 Automatic Alignment of Optical System ........... 3-4 3.1.2 Calibrating Wavelength .................................... 3-5 3.1.3 Calibrating Resolution ...................................... 3-9 3.1.4 Inputting Offset ............................................... 3-10

3.2 Connecting DUT ......................................................... 3-11 3.3 Inputting Data.............................................................. 3-12 3.4 Measurement Types ................................................... 3-13 3.5 Changing Wavelength and Resolution ....................... 3-14

3.5.1 Changing Wavelength .................................... 3-14 3.5.2 Changing Resolution ...................................... 3-14

3.6 Setting Level Scale ..................................................... 3-15 3.6.1 Changing Scale .............................................. 3-15 3.6.2 Changing Reference Level ............................. 3-15

3.7 Using Markers ............................................................. 3-16 3.7.1 Marker types ................................................... 3-16 3.7.2 Using Wavelength and Level Markers ............ 3-20 3.7.3 Using Zone Markers ....................................... 3-21

3.8 Saving and Reading Data ........................................... 3-22 3.8.1 Saving Measurement Conditions and

Waveform Data ............................................... 3-23 3.8.2 Saving Screens .............................................. 3-25 3.8.3 Reading Data from File................................... 3-26

3.9 Initializing Measurement Conditions ........................... 3-27 3.10 Releasing Panel Lock ................................................. 3-28

Page 80: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-2

3.1 Calibrating Before Measurement Calibrating this equipment before measurement assures that it meets the performance standards. After turning on the power for at least 2 hours, the following items are calibrated before measurement. During warm-up, execute Repeat sweeping with Span of 100 nm or more and VBW of 10 kHz or more.

In addition, if the usage environment experiences sudden changes in temperature, etc., such as during or after equipment transport, perform calibration after allowing sufficient time for the equipment to reach equilibrium with the room temperature and humidity.

Measured wavelength changes with changes in the internal temperature and humidity of the instrument. Consequently, recalibrate the instrument if either the ambient temperature or humidity changes.

The calibration functions of this equipment are listed below.

Table 3.1-1 Calibration Functions

No Calibration Items Where: Button Description Automatic

Alignment of Optical System

3.1.1 Auto Align Automatically aligns optical axis. Execute as described below: ● Allow the equipment to warm-up for at least

2 hours after power-on. ● Calibrate whenever the equipment is

transported or moved between different locations.

● Calibrate whenever the ambient temperature or air pressure changes significantly.

Wavelength Calibration (External optical light source)

3.1.2 Wl Cal (Ext) Wavelength calibration is performed using an external light source. Align the optical axis before performing calibration.

Wavelength Calibration (MS9740B-002)

3.1.2 Wl Cal (Ref) Wavelength calibration is performed using a light source of option 002. When Align with cal is On, automatically aligns the optical axis using the light source before performing calibration.

Wavelength Calibration (Initialization)

3.1.2 Wl Cal (Init) Initializes the wavelength calibration data.

Calibrating Resolution

3.1.3 Res Cal Measures, recalculates and calibrates effective resolution for current measurement conditions. Align the optical axis before calibrating the resolution.

Page 81: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.1 Calibrating Before Measurement

3-3

3 M

easurement

Table 3.1-1 Calibration Functions (Cont’d)

No Calibration Items Where: Button Description Sets auto offset

calibration for temperature change On/Off

3.1.2 Auto Cal On/Off

At On, the internal temperature change is monitored every 10 minutes and the offset is auto-calibrated when temperature changes significantly. At Off, the above-described offset calibration is not performed. (Default: Off)

Sets auto offset calibration for VBW change On/Off

3.1.2 Auto Offset On/Off

At On, when the Single or Repeat button is pressed immediately after VBW is changed, sweeping starts after offset calibration. (Default: On) At Off, the above-described offset calibration is not performed.

Zero Calibration 3.1.2 Zero Cal When Off is set at step , offset calibration is executed by pressing the Zero Cal button.

Offset calibration is a function for calibrating the offset level for each VBW of the equipment. When the offset level changes, sometimes the measurement results in the level direction are affected. Usually, offset level changes with temperature. To obtain the highest-accuracy measurement results, we recommend performing offset calibration () once every 2 to 3 hours.

However, offset calibration requires a fixed time period of several seconds (7 seconds). Refer to the following cases and perform setting and calibration according to your usage conditions.

Table 3.1-2 Usage Status and Optimum Calibration

Case Calibration Condition Calibration Items Case 1 Allow the equipment to warm-up for at least 2 hours after

power-on. Calibrate whenever the equipment is transported or moved between different locations. Calibrate whenever the ambient temperature or air pressure changes significantly.

Execute .

Case 2 When measuring wavelength Set Align with cal to On and execute .

Case 3 When measuring continuous spectrum, such as optical amplifier ASE level and laser diodes

Execute and .

Case 4 When wanting to increase measurement throughput (Shortening the offset calibration time when using applications that switch VBW frequently can increase the measurement system throughput.)

Set and to Off. Moreover, execute when the ambient temperature changes.

Case 5 When performing measurements requiring a long time, such as setting VBW (e.g. measuring DUT optical level and OSNR drift)

Set to On.

Case 6 When performing long-term measurements while switching multiple VBW settings

Set and to On.

Page 82: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-4

3.1.1 Automatic Alignment of Optical System Adjust the optical system to satisfy the specifications for wavelength accuracy, level accuracy, and dynamic range, using the following procedures. The automatic alignment of optical system should be performed before performing other calibration functions.

For this alignment, the external light source that meets the specification is required. Also, if MS9740B-002 Light Source for Wavelength Calibration is installed, the function of Automatic Alignment of Optical System is added. To align the optical axis automatically using this function, refer to 3.1.2 “Calibrating Wavelength”.

To calibrate using external light source: 1. Input the following optical specifications in the MS9740B.

Level –20 dBm or more Wavelength 600 to 1700 nm Spectrum single mode

2. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys. 3. Press F2 Cal. 4. Press f6 Auto Align. 5. Press f1 Execute. The “Calibrating” message is displayed. Press f2

Cancel to cancel adjustment and return to the status before executing adjustment.

6. Adjustment of the optical axis is finished when the Calibrating…message disappears from the screen.

Note: Use a single mode oscillation light source such as a DFB laser diode or gas laser.

In addition, always use a light source that meets the specifications. If the light source spectrum is not single mode or the level is too low, calibration may not be performed correctly when performing auto-alignment of the optical system. Cancel processing takes about 10 s.

To initialize Adjustment Data Initialize the automatic optical axis adjustment data using the following procedures.

1. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys. 2. Press F2 Cal. 3. Press f6 Auto Align. 4. Press f3 Init to initialize the optical axis adjustment data.

Page 83: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.1 Calibrating Before Measurement

3-5

3 M

easurement

3.1.2 Calibrating Wavelength Wavelength can be calibrated using either an external or wavelength calibration light source (MS9740B-002). High-accuracy measurement is supported by the wavelength calibration light source of MS9740B-002.

Before calibrating wavelength, always refer to 3.1.1 “Automatic Alignment of Optical System”, and then perform automatic alignment of the optical system. Before measuring wavelength, calibrate the wavelength as described below.

To calibrate using external optical light source: 1. Input the following optical specifications in the MS9740B.

Level –20 dBm or more Wavelength 600 to 1700 nm Spectrum single mode

2. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys.

3. Press F2 Cal.

4. Press f3 Wl Cal (Ext).

5. Press f1 Execute. The “Calibrating” message is displayed. Press f2 Cancel to cancel calibration and return to the status before executing calibration.

6. Calibration of the wavelength is finished when the Calibrating…message disappears from the screen.

Note: Use a single mode oscillation light source such as a DFB laser diode or gas laser.

In addition, always use a light source that meets the specifications. If the light source spectrum is not single mode or the level is too low, calibration may not be performed correctly when performing auto-alignment of the optical system.

Page 84: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-6

To calibrate using option wavelength calibration light source Calibrate using the following procedures when MS9740B-002 has been installed.

1. Connect the front-panel Optical Output connector to the Optical Input connector using an SM fiber.

2. Press F8 to display Others on the horizontal function keys.

3. Press F5 Others.

4. Press f1 Optical Output to set the light source to On. The front-panel Optical Output lamp lights.

5. Press F2 Cal. 6. Press f4 Wl Cal (Ref). 7. For MS9740B, optical axis alignment and waveform calibration can

be executed simultaneously. Press f3 Align with cal to turn it On. When Align with cal is Off, only wavelength calibration is performed.

8. Press f1 Execute to display the message indicating calibration in progress. When Align with cal is On: (Aligning and Calibrating…) When Align with cal is Off: (Calibrating…) Press f2 Cancel to cancel the calibration.

9. Calibration of the wavelength is finished when Calibrating…message disappears from the screen.

Note: The performance of the high wavelength accuracy is not guaranteed even when following the above procedures with light sources other than options.

To initialize the calibration data Return the wavelength calibration data to the factory setting using the following procedures.

1. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys.

2. Press F2 Cal.

3. Press f5 Wl Cal (Init).

4. Press f1 Execute to initialize the wavelength calibration data.

Page 85: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.1 Calibrating Before Measurement

3-7

3 M

easurement

To set automatic calibration: This function suppresses level and wavelength errors by automatically calibrating the offset in the optical module after measuring the ambient temperature and air pressure. Use this function as per the following procedures.

1. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys.

2. Press F2 Cal.

3. Press f7 More 1/2.

4. Press f2 Auto Cal to set On.

Subsequently, the level is calibrated automatically after the ambient temperature or pressure changes. During automatic calibration, the message “Auto Cal in progress” is displayed.

Note: This auto-calibration function suppresses measurement errors caused by changes in ambient temperature and pressure.

Wavelength calibration may need to be executed manually.

If remote control is used, this function turns Off.

To set Auto Offset adjustment: When Auto Offset is to On and a Single (Repeat) sweep is executed, sweeping is executed when offset is calibrated to adjust the offset when VBW is switched.

When Auto Offset is set to Off and a Single (Repeat) sweep is executed, measurement can be performed at high speed because sweeping is performed without executing offset calibration when VBW is switched.

Usually, the offset level changes with temperature. To obtain the highest-accuracy measurement results, we recommend performing offset calibration once every 2 to 3 hours. Execute Zero Cal at this time.

1. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys. 2. Press F2 Cal. 3. Press f7 More 1/2. 4. Press f3 Auto Offset to set On. When this function is turned off, the message “Auto Offset Off” displays on the screen.

Page 86: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-8

To execute Zero Cal: Zero Cal performs the same offset calibration as Auto Cal. Run Auto Cal periodically to perform offset calibration when the temperature conditions are met. Press the Zero Cal button to execute offset calibration. Note:

Zero Cal cannot be executed when Auto Cal is set to On.

1. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys. 2. Press F2 Cal. 3. Press f7 More 1/2. 4. Press f4 Zero Cal. 5. Press f1 Execute. The “Calibrating…” message is displayed.

Press f2 Cancel to cancel adjustment and return to the status before executing adjustment.

6. Calibration is finished when the “Calibrating…” message disappears from the screen.

Page 87: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.1 Calibrating Before Measurement

3-9

3 M

easurement

3.1.3 Calibrating Resolution When measuring the level of a continuous spectrum such as the ASE level of an optical fiber amplifier or the noise level of an LD, the measured level is affected by the actual resolution.

The resolution is calibrated to improve the level accuracy of this type of level measurement.

The actual resolution is adjusted using an Anritsu reference light source before shipment. Calibration of the resolution determines the actual resolution matching the light source being used.

Always perform auto-alignment of the optical system before calibrating resolution.

For the definition of actual resolution, refer to 1.3 “Glossary”.

To calibrate resolution Calibrate resolution using the following procedure.

1. Input light from a light source with the following specifications at the wavelength used at measurement to the main frame. Level: more than –20 dBm or more

Spectrum: single mode

2. Set the main frame as follows: Center wavelength: wavelength of the light source

Smplg: 1001

3. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys.

4. Press F2 Cal.

5. Press f7 More 1/2.

6. Press f1 Res Cal.

7. Press f1 Execute to display the message “Resolution Cal in progress”. Note:

Use a single mode oscillation light source such as a DFB laser diode or gas laser.

In addition, always use a light source that meets the specifications. If the light source spectrum is not single mode or the level is too low, calibration may not be performed correctly when performing auto-alignment of the optical system. Calibrating resolution cannot be interrupted. The calibration value for resolution is initialized automatically when the measurement conditions are changed.

Page 88: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-10

To initialize the calibrating data Initialize the actual resolution using the following procedure

1. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys.

2. Press F2 Cal.

3. Pres f7 More 1/2.

4. Press f1 Res Cal.

5. Press f3 Init to initialize the calibrating resolution data.

3.1.4 Inputting Offset An offset value can be added to each wavelength and level display. The offset value is used for the following purposes.

● Correcting wavelength error ● Correcting level error ● Correcting loss of devices such as optical couplers and attenuators

inserted between the DUT and main frame To input wavelength offset 1. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys.

2. Press F2 Cal.

3. Press f1 Wl Offset.

4. Enter the offset value using the keypad or rotary knob. The wavelength offset value setting range is –1.00 to 1.00 nm.

5. When the wavelength offset is a value other than 0, Wl Offset is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

To input level offset value

1. Press F8 to display Cal on the horizontal function keys.

2. Press F2 Cal.

3. Press f2 Level Offset.

4. Enter the offset value using the keypad or rotary knob. The level offset value setting range is –30.0 to 30.0 dB.

5. When the level offset is a value other than 0, Level Offset is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.

Irrespective of the trace type, level offset can be applied to 10 traces max.

Page 89: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.2 Connecting DUT

3-11

3 M

easurement

3.2 Connecting DUT Use an optical fiber cord to connect the optical source for measurement to the optical input connector of the instrument.

Figure 3.2-1 Connection Example of Optical Transceiver

Figure 3.2-2 Connection Example of Laser Diode Module

Notes:

● Accurate measurement is impossible if the optical connectors are dirty. Refer to 7.4 “Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning”.

● Use an optical fiber cord matching the light source. If a multi-mode light source is connected using single-mode fiber, optical loss will prevent accurate measurement.

● The optical input connector can be changed to match the connector of the fiber used for connection. To replace the optical connector, refer to 7.3 “Replacement of Optical Connector”.

Optical transceiver for multi-mode fiber

Multi-mode fiber

FC connector

LC connector

LD module

SC connector Single mode fiber

Page 90: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-12

3.3 Inputting Data The following keys are used to input data.

Figure 3.3-1 Data Input Keys and Rotary Knob

Keypad – (Minus) Changes sign of numeric value

BS (Back space) Deletes preceding character at the left side of the cursor

Enter Sets input Cancel Cancels input

Arrow key

Moves cursor and changes numeric values

Rotary knob

Moves cursor and changes numeric values

Enter and Cancel under the rotary knob have the same functions as the Enter and Cancel keys in the keypad.

7 8 9

4 5 6

2 3

1

0 .

BS

Keypad Arrow keys

Rotary Knob

Enter key Cancel key

Page 91: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.4 Measurement Types

3-13

3 M

easurement

3.4 Measurement Types There are three kinds of the measurement methods.

Automatic measurement Automatically sets wavelength, resolution and level and performs measurement Single measurement Sweeps waveform once When the trace Storage Mode is set to Sweep Average, Min Hold, or Max Hold, waveform sweeping is performed for the number of times set at Sweep Average. Repeat measurement Waveform sweeping is repeated until the Stop is pressed. Perform the automatic measurement: Press Auto Measure to perform automatic measurement.

The following processes are performed during automatic measurement: ● Peak wavelength, peak level and spectrum half-width of optical input

detected ● Wavelength range and resolution adjusted ● Level scale adjusted and results displayed Note:

The automatic measurement may not be performed correctly in the following cases. ● The peak level of the input light is too low. ● The level or wavelength of the input light is unstable.

Perform the single measurement: Press Single to perform the single measurement.

Perform the repeat measurement; Press Repeat to perform the repeat measurement.

Stop the measurement: Press Stop to stop the measurement.

Page 92: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-14

3.5 Changing Wavelength and Resolution This section explains how to change the wavelength and resolution on the horizontal axis of the screen.

3.5.1 Changing Wavelength To change the screen center wavelength 1. Press Center.

2. Enter the center wavelength using the rotary knob or keypad. The input setting range is from 600 to 1750 nm.

To set the wavelength with the maximum level at the screen center: 1. Press Center.

To change the range of the screen width: 1. Press Span.

2. Input the value using f1 though f7, rotary knob, or keypad. The input setting range is 0 and from 0.2 to 1200 nm.

3.5.2 Changing Resolution 1. Press Res.

2. Enter the resolution using f1 through f7.

Page 93: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.6 Setting Level Scale

3-15

3 M

easurement

3.6 Setting Level Scale To set the level scale, the vertical axis on the screen is set.

3.6.1 Changing Scale 1. Press Log (/div).

2. Input the scale per division using f1 though f7 keys or the rotary knob. The input setting range is 0.1 to 10 dB.

3.6.2 Changing Reference Level 1. Press Ref.

2. Input the reference level using the rotary knob or keypad. The input setting range is +30 to –90 dBm.

Note: When the Ref key is pressed when the scale is linear display, a message dialog box indicating that the reference level cannot be set is displayed. Press Log (/div) to change the display item to the log.

To set the wavelength peak level at the reference level, press Ref Lvl .

Page 94: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-16

3.7 Using Markers The trace data can be read using markers.

3.7.1 Marker types There are following markers in the MS9740B.

Wavelength marker Used to read waveform, wavelength and wavelength difference

The following data can be read.

● Wavelength at waveform peaks and dips ● Difference in wavelength between peaks for waveforms with several

peaks ● Spectrum width Level marker Used to read waveform, level and level difference The following data can be read. ● Level at waveform peaks and dips ● Difference in level between peaks for waveforms with several peaks ● Difference in level of two waveforms Trace marker Used to read wavelength and level of any point The following data can be read. ● Wavelength and level at waveform peaks and dips Delta marker Used to read difference in wavelength and level from trace marker position. The following data can be read. ● Difference in wavelength and level between peaks for waveforms with

several peaks Zone marker The zone marker can be used for the following purposes. ● Limit wavelength range for analysis such as peak point search

The zone marker analyze and process the part surrounded with the red frame (refer to Figure 3.7.1-5).

● Zooming in waveform wavelength direction The zone marker enlarge the display of the range surrounded with the red frame (refer to Figure 3.7.1-6).

Page 95: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.7 Using Markers

3-17

3 M

easurement

Figure 3.7.1-1 Waveform Marker Display

Figure 3.7.1-2 Level Marker Display

Page 96: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-18

Figure 3.7.1-3 Trace Marker Display

Figure 3.7.1-4 Delta Marker Display

Page 97: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.7 Using Markers

3-19

3 M

easurement

Figure 3.7.1-5 Analysis Range Limited By Zone Markers

Figure 3.7.1-6 Enlarged Zone Marker Display

Zoom In

Zoom Out

Page 98: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-20

3.7.2 Using Wavelength and Level Markers To display the makers reading wavelength and level: 1. Press Marker Select.

2. Select the marker with f1 through f6. f1 λMkr_A: wavelength marker A f2 λMkr_B: wavelength marker B f3 LMkr_C: level marker C f4 LMkr_D: level marker D f5 TMkr : trace marker f6 ΔMkr : delta marker

3. Turn the rotary knob to move the marker.

4. The marker wavelength and level is displayed in the marker display field.

5. Press Marker Select and select f7 Erase to delete the marker. Note:

f5 TMkr and f6 ΔMkr can be used when the active trace is displayed. The marker is not displayed when the power monitor is displayed. Instead of λMkr, fMkr is displayed at the frequency display.

To display the marker at the peak level position: Press Peak Search. The trace marker is displayed at the peak level position.

Page 99: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.7 Using Markers

3-21

3 M

easurement

3.7.3 Using Zone Markers Setting zone markers restricts the peak and dip point search range (4.4 “Displaying Level Peaks and Dips”) and the waveform analysis range (4.5 “Analyzing Waveform”) and expands the on-screen display.

1. Press Zone Marker.

2. Press f1 Zone Center.

3. Enter the center wavelength of the zone marker using the rotary knob and keypad.

4. Press f2 Zone Width.

5. Enter the zone marker width using the f1 through f5, rotary knob and keypad.

6. Press f4 Zoom Out/In to enlarge the display of the zone marker range. Press f4 Zoom Out/In again to return the previous display.

7. When pressing f3 Zone → Span, the zone marker width is set to Span. In this case, the display cannot be returned the non-enlarged previous one.

8. Press f7 Erase to delete the zone marker.

Page 100: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-22

3.8 Saving and Reading Data The following data is saved to the file: ● Measured data and measurement condition ● Measured data ● Screen display The files saving the measured data and measurement condition can be read.

Files can be saved in the following three formats.

● CSV text files with comma separators. This file type is ideal for reading with spreadsheet software and text editors. Files saved in CSV format cannot be read using the Recall function. With Save CSV, only the active trace is saved. With Save CSV All, all traces are saved.

● XML(Extended Markup Language) text files with syntax. These files can be both saved and read.

● Image files with either the bmp or png extensions. These files are ideal for reading with word-processing or graphics-editing software. Files saved in the Image format cannot be read using the Recall function.

Note: The data saved by MS9740B cannot be read out by MS9740A of V1.06.02 or older.

Page 101: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.8 Saving and Reading Data

3-23

3 M

easurement

3.8.1 Saving Measurement Conditions and Waveform Data To input the file name and save the file: 1. Press F6 Config at the horizontal menu.

2. Press f2 Copy Setting to set File Name Settings to User-Specified Name.

3. Press f7 Set.

4. Press Save.

5. Press f1 Device to open the device selection window.

6. Select the destination device using the arrow key.

7. Press f7 Set.

8. Select the file format using f3 Save CSV All, f4 Save CSV, or f5 Save XML.

9. Enter the file name using the following procedures:

a. Select the displayed characters on the dialog box using the rotary knob.

b. Press Enter to confirm the characters.

c. Move the cursor using the arrow key to change the characters. Select the displayed characters on the dialog box using the rotary knob.

d. Press f7 Set to confirm the file name. Steps 1 and 2 are not required for second and subsequent operations.

Note: If the save destination is external USB memory, the path [\Anritsu Corporation\Optical Spectrum Analyzer\User Data] is created automatically in the USB memory root directory.

Figure 3.8.1-1 File Name Input Dialog Box

Select the characters on the dialog box to enter the file name. A copied file name cannot be pasted into the dialog box.

Page 102: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-24

Automatically Creating File Name and Saving File If the file name is created automatically, inputting the file name at the dialog box can be omitted.

Select Data + sequence number (000-999) at step 2 of the Input File Name and Save File procedures. When Save is pressed at this time, the dialog box of step 6 is not displayed and the automatically created file name is saved.

The saved file name is as follows: XML format file:

AllWaveData + date + "_" + consecutive-number.xml

Example: AllWaveData20190409_004.xml

CSV format file:

WaveData + date + "_" + consecutive-number.csv

Example: WaveData20190410_001.csv Note:

The level of waveform data saved to a CSV file is a linear value in mW units. Low levels may be displayed prefixed by a negative (–) sign.

In this equipment, the average value of measured noise is level 0 so any noise level lower than the average value is displayed as a negative value. The level of the optical input to the equipment is not negative.

Only the analysis result described in the following section is output to the csv.files saved with f3 Save CSV All.

● 5.5 “Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals”

● 5.8 “Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)”

Only the analysis result described in the following section is output to the csv.files saved with f4 Save CSV.

● 5.5 “Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals”

Page 103: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.8 Saving and Reading Data

3-25

3 M

easurement

3.8.2 Saving Screens Pressing Copy saves the screen display to a file.

The file extension, name and save destination folder can be set at the Copy Settings described in Section 6.1.1 “Setting Interfaces and File Operating Environment”. When a USB memory stick is connected, you can specify it as a save destination. Refer to 6.2 “Managing Files” for details. The procedure is the same as described in Section 3.8.1 “Saving Measurement Conditions and Waveform Data” where automatic or manual input of the file name can be selected. When automatic is set, the file name has the following structure:

Copy + date + "_" + consecutive-number.bmp

Example: Copy20190410_000.bmp

Page 104: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-26

3.8.3 Reading Data from File 1. Press Recall.

2. Press f1 Device.

3. If the device selection dialog box opens, use the arrow keys to select the device from where the file will be read.

4. Press f7 Set.

5. Press f3 Recall XML.

6. If the file selection dialog box is displayed, use the arrow keys to select the file.

7. Press f7 Set.

Figure 3.8.3-1 File Selection Dialog box

Page 105: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

3.9 Initializing Measurement Conditions

3-27

3 M

easurement

3.9 Initializing Measurement Conditions Initialize the MS9740B measurement conditions.

1. Press Preset .

2. Press f1 Preset.

For the initialized conditions and values, refer to Appendix B “Initial Values”. At the same time that measurement conditions are initialized, waveforms are erased from display. Measurement results described in Chapter 5 “Measurement Functions” are cleared as well. Waveform data saved to a file is not deleted when the measurement conditions are initialized.

Page 106: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 3 Measurement

3-28.

3.10 Releasing Panel Lock When this instrument is under remote control, panel keys except the Power and Local keys are disabled. This is called the panel lock state.

Press Local to disable the panel lock.

The panel is locked again at remote control after the panel lock has been previously released.

Page 107: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4-1

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

Changing Measurement Conditions Chapter 4

This chapter explains how to change the measurement conditions using the function keys.

4.1 Wavelength-related Settings ....................................... 4-2 4.2 Setting Level Display................................................... 4-5 4.3 Changing Data Capturing Method ............................... 4-7 4.4 Displaying Level Peaks and Dips .............................. 4-11 4.5 Analyzing Waveform ................................................. 4-13

4.5.1 Analyzing Single Spectrum Center Wavelength and Spectrum Width .................. 4-14

4.5.2 Analyzing Single Spectrum SMSR ................. 4-15 4.5.3 Analyzing Multiple Spectrum Center

Wavelength and Spectrum Width (ndB Loss Method) ........................................ 4-16

4.5.4 Analyzing Multiple Spectrum Center Wavelength and Spectrum Width (Envelope Method) ........................................ 4-17

4.5.5 Analyzing Multiple Spectrum Center Wavelength and Spectrum Width (RMS Method)............................................... 4-18

4.5.6 Measuring Spectrum Power by Integration .... 4-20 4.5.7 Erasing Analysis Results ............................... 4-21

4.6 Changing Waveform Memory Settings and Calculation between Memories ................................. 4-22

4.7 Changing Measurement Mode .................................. 4-27 4.8 Inputting Title to Waveform Data ............................... 4-31 4.9 Using Light Source Option ........................................ 4-32

Page 108: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-2

4.1 Wavelength-related Settings Press F1 Wavelength key to set the wavelength related to Figure 4.1-1.

Figure 4.1-1 Names of Wavelength Display

To set screen display Center wavelength: 1. Press f1 Center or Center.

The current Center is displayed in the setting value input field. 2. Enter the wavelength using the rotary knob or keypad.

The Center setting range is 600 to 1750 nm. Note:

The Start and Stop are also changed when the Center is changed.

To set screen wavelength sweep or span: 1. Press f2 Span or Span.

The current Span is displayed in the setting value input filed. 2. Select the numeric value from f1 to f6 or enter the value using the

rotary knob or keypad. The Span setting range is 0 nm, or from 0.2 nm to 1200 nm.

Note: The Start and Stop are also changed when the Span is changed. When Span is set to 0 nm, the same wavelength data is displayed as a graph in the time domain.

Start Wavelength scale

Center Stop Wavelength in air/ Wavelength in a vacuum

Numeric entry input

Page 109: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.1 Wavelength-related Settings

4-3

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

To set left screen wavelength start: 1. Press f4 Start. 2. Enter the wavelength using the rotary knob and keypad. The Start setting range is from 600 to 1750 nm.

Input a smaller wavelength than the Stop value. Note:

The Center and Span are also changed when the Start is changed.

To set right screen wavelength stop: 1. Press f5 Stop. 2. Enter the wavelength using the rotary knob and keypad.

The Stop setting range is from 600 to 1800 nm. Input a larger wavelength than the Start value.

Note: The Center and Span are also changed when the Stop is changed.

To change position of wavelength displayed at marker: This function switches the wavelength of the trace markers, delta markers and analysis part to frequency display.

1. Press f6 MkrValue Wl/Freq. 2. At wavelength display, λMkr is displayed at the screen top left.

At frequency display, fMkr is displayed at the screen top left. The frequency f (Hz) is calculated using the following equation: f = c /λ c : Speed of light 2.99792458 × 108 (m/s) λ : Wavelength in vacuum (m)

Note: The following items are not displayed in the Frequency unit. ● Zone marker ● Application result ● Graph x-axis ● Center/Span/Start/Stop setting

Page 110: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-4

To switch wavelength display: The wavelength in a vacuum can be displayed using the index of refraction in air determined by the MS9740B internal temperature and pressure.

1. Press f7 Value in Air/Vacuum. 2. When displaying the wavelength in air, in Air is displayed between

Center and Stop. When displaying the wavelength in vacuum, in Vacuum is displayed between Center and Stop.

Note: When selecting frequency at marker frequency display, the waveform display switches to the value in vacuum (in Vacuum).

Page 111: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.2 Setting Level Display

4-5

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

4.2 Setting Level Display Press F2 Level Scale key to set the level display.

Figure 4.2-1 Name of Level Display

To set log scale: Set Level Scale to Log Scale and set the scale ratio to dB units.

1. Press f1 Log (/div) or Log (/div). The current log scale is displayed in the setting value input field.

2. Select the numeric value from f1 to f7 or enter the value using the rotary knob or keypad. The log scale setting range is 0.1 to 10 dB.

Displays when using internal attenuator

Numerical value entry area

Log scale

Reference level

Page 112: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-6

To set reference level: When Level Scale is set to Log Scale, the reference level is called Reference Level.

Note: When Linear Scale is set, the bottom of the vertical axis become 0 W and cannot be changed.

1. Press f2 Ref Level or Ref. The current reference level is displayed in the setting value input field.

2. Enter the value using the rotary knob or keypad. Press Ref Lvl to set the maximum level of waveform to the reference level.

The setting reference level range is as follows. Normal display: –90 to +30 dBm Relative display: –100 to +100 dB To set linear scale 1. Press f4 Linear Level.

The current settings are displayed in the setting value input field. 2. Select the value from f1 to f6, or enter the value using the rotary

knob or keypad. The setting linear scale range is as follows. Normal display: 1 pW to 1 W Relative display: 1 to 200 % To set internal optical attenuator: When the optical level is 10 mW (+10 dBm) or more, set the internal optical attenuator as follows:

1. Press f6 Opt.Att On/Off. 2. When using the optical attenuator, Opt. ATT On is displayed in the

lower right of the screen. 3. Press f6 Opt.Att On/Off again to release the settings of the optical

attenuator.

Page 113: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.3 Changing Data Capturing Method

4-7

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

4.3 Changing Data Capturing Method The following measurement conditions can be set.

Resolution This sets the optical wavelength resolution for measuring the optical spectrum (wavelength resolution determined by built-in grating). The actual resolution at the Center wavelength can be displayed. For the resolution and actual resolution, refer to 1.3 “Glossary”. VBW This sets the bandwidth of the internal optical receiver amplifier. A narrower VBW reduces noise. Set a wider bandwidth when measuring modulated light. Averaging This suppresses randomly generated noise. There are three types of averaging processing: point average, sweep average, and smoothing. Point and sweep averaging suppress noise by performing repeated measurements and averaging the results. ● Point average:

Performs measurement for set number of times at each sampling point and finds average

● Sweep average Performs wavelength sweeping for set number of times and finds average from each measured data

The sweep average is calculated by the following formula. When sweep count < sweep average set count:

When sweep count ≥ sweep average set count:

( ) ( ) ( ) ( )N

nMnYNnY +−×−=

11

Y (n):Average value, M(n): Measurement value, N: Sweep average setting count, n: Sweep count Smoothing suppresses noise by averaging multiple data in the wavelength direction. Two or more average processing can be performed simultaneously.

( ) ( ) ( ) ( )n

nMnYnnY +−×−=

11

Page 114: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-8

Sampling Point This sets the data points captured at one measurement. When there are many sampling points, the measured data wavelength interval becomes smaller and the measurement time becomes longer. The data capture method is displayed in the measurement condition display field.

Figure 4.3-1 Measurement Condition Display Field

Press F3 Res/VBW/Avg key to set the data acquiring method.

To set resolution (Res): 1. Press f1 Res. 2. Select the value from f1 to f7. To set VBW: 1. Press f2 VBW. 2. Select the value from f1 to f6. When the VBW is narrow, the waveform noise is reduced but the measurement time becomes longer. The relationship between VBW and measurement time is shown in Appendix E VBW Band Width and Sweep Speed. To set Point Average: 1. Press f3 Point Average. 2. Enter the value using the rotary knob and keypad and press f7 Set.

The averaging count is 2 to 1000. 3. Press f2 Off to release the averaging processing. When Point Average is changed, the change results are reflected in the measurement method even during sweeping.

Resolution

VBW

Sampling point count

Actual resolution

Smoothing processing point count

Averaging processing count

Averaging processing addition count

Page 115: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.3 Changing Data Capturing Method

4-9

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

To set Sweep Average: 1. Press f4 Sweep Average.

2. Input the value using the rotary knob and keypad and press f7 Set. The averaging count is 1 to 1000. Averaging is not performed when 1 is set.

3. Press F6 Trace. 4. Press f1 Active Trace. 5. Select the trace to be averaged. 6. Press f2. Trace Type.

7. Select f1 Write. 8. Press f3 Storage Mode.

9. Select Sweep Average. If the following items are changed during measurement, the averaging count returns to 1.

● Center ● D.Range ● Ext.Trig ● Opt.Att ● Sampling Points ● Res ● Span ● Start ● Stop ● VBW To set smoothing process: 1. Press f5 Smooth. 2. Select the numeric value from f2 to f6. 3. Press f1 Off to release the smoothing processing. In the smoothing processing, the graph line is smoothed using the exact smoothing points and the averaging points of before and after the smoothing points. The MS9740B can set the number of the exact smoothing points and before and after its smoothing points; increasing the smoothing points increases the deformation of the measured waveform.

Page 116: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-10

To set sampling point count: 1. Press f6 Sampling Points. 2. Select the numeric value from f1 to f6. The sampling point count is the number of points within the sweep width where data is captured. When the number of sampling points is small, the measurement time is shorter. However, sometimes the measurement may be inaccurate, depending on the relationship between the sweep width and the resolution. Set the number of sampling points so that the following relationship is satisfied.

If the number of sampling points is smaller than the right-hand value, “Res Uncal” is displayed on the right lower side of the screen.

P > = Span / Res + 1 P: Sampling point count Span: Sweep width (nm) Res: Resolution (nm)

Example: When the resolution is 0.1 nm at a sweep width of 50 nm, P > = 50/0.1 + 1 = 501. Set 501 or more sampling points at this time.

The internal minimum resolution is 1 pm. If a smaller resolution is set, the waveform will be displayed at a resolution of 1 pm. To display actual resolution: 1. Press f7 Act-Res On/Off.

The measurement condition field displays the actual resolution at the Center wavelength.

Page 117: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.4 Displaying Level Peaks and Dips

4-11

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

4.4 Displaying Level Peaks and Dips The MS9740B has search functions for finding the maximum and minimum waveform levels and peak and dip points. These functions are executed at the Active Trace.

Additionally, if the zone markers are displayed, the data between the zone markers is the target data for searching position. The target of analysis is data displayed on the screen. Changing Span may sometimes mean some data is not displayed and peak and dip points in this non-displayed data will not be searched.

Press F4 Peak/Dip Search key to use this function.

Figure 4.4-1 Waveform Peaks and Dips

To display peak point: Press f1 Peak Search. The position on the waveform with the maximum level is indicated by the trace marker. To display dip point Press f2 Dip Search. The position on the waveform with the minimum level is indicated by the trace marker.

Dip point (Dip) Minimum Peak Point Maximum (Peak)

Page 118: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-12

To display peak point in ascending order or dip point in descending order: Press f4 Next. At peak point display, the trace marker moves to the next peak level. At dip point display, the trace marker moves to the next dip level. To display peak point in descending order or dip point in ascending order: Press f5 Last At peak point display, the trace marker moves to the previous peak level. At dip point display, the trace marker moves to the previous dip level. To display peaks and dips to left of current position: Press f6 Left. The trace marker moves to the next peak or dip on the left. To display peaks and dips to right of current position: Press f7 Right. The trace marker moves to the next peak or dip on the right. To release peak/dip display: Press f3 Off. To set threshold that detects peak and dip points. 1. Press f8 More 1/2. 2. Press f1 Search Threshold Auto Manual, select Manual. 3. Set f2 Search Threshold.

Peak and dip points are detected with the specified threshold. Notes:

● Peak and dip points are detected automatically, regardless of Search Threshold setting values.

● Search Threshold setting values are used for the threshold to detect next higher peak point or next lower dip point.

To display Peak to Peak of peak/dip points. 1. Press f8 More 1/2. 2. Set f4 Peak to Peak Calculation to On.

Peak to Peak level is displayed on the screen, and the color of peak/dip points change.

Page 119: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.5 Analyzing Waveform

4-13

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

4.5 Analyzing Waveform The spectrum waveform center wavelength, half width, side mode suppression ratio and spectrum integrated power can be analyzed.

This function is executed at the Active Trace. In addition, when the zone markers are displayed, data between the zone markers is searched. The target of analysis is data displayed on the screen. Changing Span may sometimes mean some data is not displayed and this non-displayed data cannot be analyzed. Press F5 Analysis key to use this function.

Page 120: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-14

4.5.1 Analyzing Single Spectrum Center Wavelength and Spectrum Width

1. Press f1 Threshold. 2. Select the cut level from f1 to f4 and enter the value using the rotary

knob or keypad. The cut level, which is an attenuator from the peak level, can be used to calculate the spectrum width. The cut level input range is 0.1 to 50 dB.

3. The cut level, center wavelength (λc) and spectrum width (Δλ)are displayed.

Figure 4.5.1-1 Threshold Analysis

The center wavelength (λc) and spectrum width (Δλ)are calculated by the following formula. λc = (λ1 + λ2)/2

Δλ = λ2 – λ1

λ1: Shortest wavelength in all wavelengths crossed with the level lowered cut level from the peak level

λ2: Longest wavelength in all wavelengths crossed with the level lowered cut level from the peak level

If there are no crossing wavelengths with the cut level, the following values are displayed:

λc: Center wavelength (Center) Δλ: Wavelength difference between right and left sides (Span)

Cut level Analysis result display field

Page 121: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.5 Analyzing Waveform

4-15

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

4.5.2 Analyzing Single Spectrum SMSR The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the spectrum peak and adjacent mode spectrum levels.

1. Press f3 SMSR. 2. Select the side mode from f1 to f3.

2nd Peak: Next highest side mode from maximum level Left: Peak point at short-wavelength side of max. level Right: Peak point at long-wavelength side of max. level

3. The selected side mode search method, wavelength difference Δλ and level difference Δl are displayed. Δl is the SMSR.

Figure 4.5.2-1 SMSR Analysis

The peak wavelength and side mode wavelength at marker A and B are displayed. The wavelength difference between marker B and A is displayed as the wavelength difference Δλ.

The peak level and side mode level at marker C and D are displayed. The level difference between marker C and D is displayed as the wavelength difference Δl.

Level difference ∆l

Analysis result display field

Wavelength difference ∆λ

Page 122: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-16

4.5.3 Analyzing Multiple Spectrum Center Wavelength and Spectrum Width (ndB Loss Method)

In the ndB Loss method, the level of the part that is ndB loss below the peak level is the threshold level. The center wavelength, spectrum width and vertical oscillation mode count from the spectrum of the vertical oscillation mode exceeding the threshold level is analyzed.

1. Press f2 ndB Loss. 2. Select the loss from f1 to f4 and enter the value using the rotary knob

and keypad. The loss input range is 0.1 to 50 dB.

3. The loss, center wavelength λc, spectrum width Δλ and vertical oscillation mode count N are displayed.

Figure 4.5.3-1 ndB Loss Analysis

The center wavelength (λc) and spectrum width (Δλ) are calculated by the following formula.

λc = (λ1 + λ2)/2

Δλ = λ2 – λ1

λ1: Peak point wavelength counted from the shortest wavelength in all wavelengths crossed with the level lowered loss from the peak level

λ2: Peak point wavelength counted from the longest wavelength in all wavelengths crossed with the level lowered loss from the peak level

The vertical oscillation mode count N is the number spectra for levels higher than Level Marker D.

Loss (ndB)

Analysis result display field

Page 123: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.5 Analyzing Waveform

4-17

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

4.5.4 Analyzing Multiple Spectrum Center Wavelength and Spectrum Width (Envelope Method)

In the Envelope method, an envelope is drawn linking the spectrum peak points. The center wavelength and spectrum width are analyzed from the wavelength of the intersection between the envelope line and the cut level part lower than the peak level as well as the spectrum width are analyzed.

The envelope is displayed when the vertical axis is linear scale.

1. Press f4 Envelope. 2. Select the cut level from f1 to f4 or enter the value using the rotary

knob or keypad. The cut level input range is 0.1 to 20 dB.

3. The cut level, center wavelength λc, spectrum width Δλ are displayed.

Figure 4.5.4-1 Envelope Analysis

The center wavelength (λc) and spectrum width (Δλ) are calculated by the following formula. λc = (λ1 + λ2)/2

Δλ = λ2 – λ1

λ1: Shortest wavelength in all wavelengths crossing the level with the level lowered cut level from the peak level and the envelope

λ2: Longest wavelength in all wavelengths crossing the level with the level lowered cut level from the peak level and the envelope

Cut level Analysis result display field Envelope

Page 124: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-18

4.5.5 Analyzing Multiple Spectrum Center Wavelength and Spectrum Width (RMS Method)

In the RMS method, the center wavelength and standard deviation (σ) are found from the spectrum with a level exceeding the slice level. The value of the standard deviation (σ) multiplier (k) is displayed as the spectrum half width.

1. Press f5 RMS. 2. Either select the k multiplier for the standard deviation (σ) using the

f1 to f5 keys or input the value using the rotary knob or keypad. The input multipliers are 1.00 to 10.00.

3. Press f6 S.Level. 4. Enter the slice level value using the rotary knob or keypad.

The cut level input range is 0.1 to 50 dB. 5. The ratio, center wavelength λc,spectrum width kσ are displayed.

Figure 4.5.5-1 RMS Analysis

Analysis Result Display Field

Page 125: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.5 Analyzing Waveform

4-19

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

The center wavelength (λc) and standard deviation (σ) are calculated by the following formula.

AnAAnAnAA

Ai

iAic n

i

n

i

++++++

==

=

=

......21.....2211

1

1 λλλλ

λ

=

=

−×= n

i

n

i

Ai

ciAi

1

1

2)}({ λλσ

Ai: Level of i-th peak point of spectrum exceeding the level lowered slice level from peak level. The setting unit is W. λi: Wavelength of i-th peak point of spectrum exceeding the level lowered slice level from peak level n: Peak level count

The wavelength marker is displayed at the spectrum width.

Level Marker C indicates the spectrum peak level and Level Marker D indicates the half value of the peak level.

The relationship between the multiplier k and level difference of the Gaussian distribution function is shown in the following diagram.

Figure 4.5.5-2 Multiplier k and Gaussian Distribution Function Level Difference

x

Level difference

y

k 1 2 2.35 3 6.07 Level difference (dB)

0.54 2.17 3.00 4.89 20.0

Page 126: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-20

4.5.6 Measuring Spectrum Power by Integration 1. Press f6 Spectrum Power. 2. The integrated power of the spectrum data on the screen and the

center wavelength λc obtained from the weighted average of the level are displayed.

Figure 4.5.6-1 Spectrum Power Example

The center wavelength (λc) and power (p) are calculated by the following formula.

AnAA

nAnAA

Ai

iAic n

i

n

i

++++++

==

=

=

......21.....2211

1

1 λλλλ

λ

esActR

AiP

n

i∑=

×∆×= 1

λα

Ai: Level of ith measurement point in W units λi: Wavelength of ith measurement point Δλ: Measurement point wavelength interval ActRes: Actual resolution n: Sampling points α: Equipment dependent power correction coefficient

Analysis result display field

Page 127: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.5 Analyzing Waveform

4-21

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

4.5.7 Erasing Analysis Results 1. Press f7 Off. 2. The analysis results display is erased. Both the Wavelength Marker

and Level Marker can be used as markers for analysis.

Page 128: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-22

4.6 Changing Waveform Memory Settings and Calculation between Memories

The MS9740B has 10 waveform memories called trace memories. The trace display and store methods can be changed. Also, the calculation can be performed between traces. Press the F6 Trace key to use this function.

Notes: ● The calculated wavelength and other wavelength cannot be

displayed at the same time.

● Only traces with the same display mode as the Active Trace are displayed. Traces using other display modes are not displayed.

The trace information is displayed on the screen as shown below.

Figure 4.6-1 Trace Display

Trace name A Wri Max

Trace type

Active trace display Storage mode or calculating formula

Page 129: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.6 Changing Waveform Memory Settings and Calculation between Memories

4-23

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

Figure 4.6-2 Trace Setting Flowchart

Select Active Trace.

Set Trace Type.

Trace Type=Write

Yes

No

Set Storage Mode. Trace Type= Calculation

Yes

No

Set Calculation Formula.

Set Display On/Off.

Set Absolute/Relative Display Method.

Start

End

Page 130: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-24

Selecting Active Trace The trace setting target is called the Active Trace. First, select the Active trace from A to J.

1. Press f1 Active Trace. 2. Select the Active Trace from A to J using the f1 to f7 keys. Setting Trace Type The trace data updating method is called the Trace Type. Set the Trace type for the Active trace.

1. Press f2 Trace Type. 2. Select the data update method from f1 to f4.

Write: Writes data after measurement completed Fix: Keeps data; data not overwritten after measurement Calculate: Calculates between traces Blank: Discards data and erases waveform from display

Measured data not saved When Write, Fix or Calculate are selected, Wri, Fix, and Cal, are

displayed on the trace respectively. Note:

The trace type cannot be set to Calculate when executing F7 Application functions other than PMD.

Setting Storage Mode When Write is set at the trace type, the data save method can be set.

1. Press f3 Storage Mode. 2. Select the data save method from f1 to f5.

f1 Off: Stores measured data as is f2 Sweep Average: Calculates average from values in waveform memory and measured value f3 Max Hold: Only overwrites measured values bigger than values in waveform memory f4 Min Hold: Only overwrites measured values smaller than values in waveform memory f5 Overlap: Overwrites most recent trace over the previous trace in each sweep.

Page 131: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.6 Changing Waveform Memory Settings and Calculation between Memories

4-25

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

Note: When storage mode is set to Overlap, Traces are overwritten on the display. However, only the most recent trace becomes the target traces to be measured. They are:

● Trace whose data can be read out by marker ● Trace to be stored to memory ● Trace whose spectrum width or center wavelength is measured

by Spectrum Analysis Setting Calculating Formula When Calculate is set at the trace type, the data calculating method can be set.

1. Press f4 Calculation. 2. Select the calculation-target trace from the dialog box using the

arrow keys. Grayed-out traces cannot be selected. The calculation method is displayed in the trace.

Note: Only traces made with the same measurement conditions (wavelength range, resolution, number of sampling points) can be calculated. Err is displayed when the trace calculation cannot be performed because the measurement conditions are different between traces.

When the selected trace type is changed to Calculate or Blank, the calculation equation is erased and the trace type becomes Blank. When Calculate is selected, only traces with the Calculate trace type are displayed.

Setting Trace Display Set whether to display the Active Trace on the screen.

1. Press f5 Display. When the trace is displayed on the screen, set to On.

2. When f5 Display is pressed to set Off, the trace display is erased from the screen. The names of traces that are not displayed on the screen are erased from the trace display.

Note: When display of the Active Trace is set to Off, the analysis functions and trace markers cannot be used.

Page 132: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-26

Setting Relative or Absolute Value Display The Active Trace level display can be set to relative or absolute level. When relative level is set, the spectrum peak level is displayed as 100% or 0 dBm and the units are either % or dB.

1. Press f6 Graph. 2. Select the display method from f1 and f2.

Normal: The vertical axis units are either W or dBm. Normalize: The vertical axis units are either % or dBm.

Erasing Overlap Display Erase Overlap Traces on the screen.

1. Press f7 Erase Overlap.

Page 133: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.7 Changing Measurement Mode

4-27

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

4.7 Changing Measurement Mode The spectrum measurement modes are listed below.

● High dynamic range mode (High D.Range) ● Sweep start using external trigger (Ext Trigger) ● Sweep repeat at fixed time interval (Interval Time) ● Power measurement (Power Monitor) ● Multi-mode fiber mode (MM Mode) To uses these functions, press F8 to display the Measure Mode and press F1.

Measurement modes such as the interval measurement mode, dynamic range mode, and external trigger mode are displayed in the measurement settings display field.

Figure 4.7-1 Measurement Settings Field and Power Measurement

Display

External trigger setting display

Dynamic range mode display Measurement

time interval

Power Measurement Display

Multi mode fiber measurement indication

Page 134: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-28

To change to High dynamic range mode (High D.Range) The measurement time is longer in the high dynamic range mode but the dynamic range performance is improved.

1. Press f1 Dynamic Range to switch to High. The High-D.Range is displayed in the measurement settings display field.

2. To release the high-dynamic range mode and return to the Normal mode, press f1 Dynamic Range. The High-D.Range display in the measurement settings display field is erased.

To use External Trigger (Ext Trigger) When the level of the external trigger at the back-panel Trigger connector changes from low to high, the data for one sampling points is measured.

1. Press f2 Ext. Trigger Delay. The ExtTrig is displayed in the measurement condition display field. 2. Enter the delay time using the keypad or rotary knob.

The delay time is from the trigger input until measurement is started. The delay time can be entered from 0 to 5 s. The ExtTrig is displayed in the measurement condition display field.

3. Press Single or Repeat. When the signal level at the Trigger connector is changed, the data

for one sampling point is captured. Notes:

● If the signal level at the Trigger connector is changed before the delay time has elapsed, that signal is ignored.

● Set VBW to be larger than the reciprocal of the delay time.

● Input the TTL level when setting the external trigger signal.

● Set the frequency of the external trigger signal to 500 kHz or less.

Page 135: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.7 Changing Measurement Mode

4-29

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

To release external trigger 1. Press f2 Ext. Trigger Delay. 2. Press f1 Off. To set measurement time interval (Interval Time) 1. Press f3 Interval Time. 2. Enter the time using the keypad or rotary knob.

The delay time can be entered from 0 s to 5940 s (99 m). Note:

The measurement time interval is from the start of one sweep until the start of the next sweep. If the time for one sweep is longer than the measurement time interval, that setting is ignored.

To perform power measurement (Power Monitor) At power measurement, the value of the optical power input to the MS9740B is displayed.

1. Press f4 Power Monitor. 2. Press f1 Wavelength. 3. Select the wavelength from f1 to f4.

It may take about 10 seconds to display the power measurement data.

Note: Power Monitor can not be selected when Application functions are running.

To release power measurement 1. Press f4 Power Monitor. 2. Press f7 Off. To set Multimode Fiber Mode (MM mode) When using multimode fiber, read the precautions in Section 2.7. Use multimode fiber in the following conditions:

● When measuring faceted light sources such as LEDs, VCSELs, etc. ● When measuring in recommended launch mode using dummy fiber

patch cord (GSGG) for optical loss measurement 1. Press f5 MM Mode. 2. Set to On. 3. MM Mode On is displayed at the bottom right of the screen.

Page 136: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-30

To release MM Mode The MM mode is released under the following conditions: ● When connecting single mode fiber. ● When measuring optical output of LD module not in recommended

launch mode using dummy fiber patch cord (GSGG) for optical loss measurement

1. Press f5 MM Mode. 2. Set to Off.

Page 137: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

4.8 Inputting Title to Waveform Data

4-31

4 Changing M

easurement Conditions

4.8 Inputting Title to Waveform Data The character strings displayed in the title bar is called title. The title can include up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols.

To input title: 1. Press F8 to display Others in the horizontal function keys. 2. Press F5 Others. 3. Press f2 Title. 4. If the title input dialog box is displayed, input the characters using

the rotary knob. 5. Press Enter to set the characters. 6. When title input is completed, press f7 Set.

When title input is cancelled, press f8 Cancel. Characters can also be input from a connected external keyboard.

Figure 4.8-1 Title Input Dialog box

Page 138: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 4 Changing Measurement Conditions

4-32.

4.9 Using Light Source Option Perform the following operations to use the installed Light Source For Wavelength Calibration MS9740B-002. 1. Press F8 to display Others on the vertical function key. 2. Press F5 Others. 3. Press f1 Optical Output to set to On.

The Optical Output LED on the front panel lights. If MS9740B-002 has not been installed, f1 Optical Output is not displayed.

Page 139: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5-1

5 M

easurement Functions

Measurement Functions Chapter 5

MS9740B has various dedicated measurement functions for measuring optical elements, optical amplifiers, wavelength multiplexers, etc. This chapter explains how to use these functions. Before using the analysis functions described in this chapter: ● Set F6 Trace – f6 Graph – f1 Normal.

If F6 Trace – f6 Graph – f2 Normalize is set, the functions explained here cannot be used.

Set F6 Trace – f2 Trace Type – f1 Write or f2 Fix. If F6 Trace – f2 Trace Type – f1 Calculate is set, only PMD (Polarization Mode Dispersion described in 5.4 “Measuring PMD (Polarization Mode Dispersion)") can be measured.

5.1 Measuring DFB-LD (Distributed Feedback Laser Diode) ............................ 5-3 5.1.1 Setting Items ................................................... 5-4 5.1.2 Calculation Method ......................................... 5-5 5.1.3 Procedure ....................................................... 5-6

5.2 Measuring FP-LD (Fabry-Perot Laser Diode) .............. 5-7 5.2.1 Setting Items ................................................... 5-8 5.2.2 Calculation Method ......................................... 5-8 5.2.3 Procedure ....................................................... 5-9

5.3 Measuring LED (Light Emitting Diode) ....................... 5-10 5.3.1 Setting Items ................................................. 5-11 5.3.2 Calculation Method ....................................... 5-11 5.3.3 Procedure ..................................................... 5-12

5.4 Measuring PMD (Polarization Mode Dispersion) ........ 5-13 5.4.1 Setting Items ................................................. 5-14 5.4.2 Calculation Method ....................................... 5-15 5.4.3 Procedures ................................................... 5-15

5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals...................................................................... 5-17 5.5.1 WDM Measurement Screen Display .............. 5-18 5.5.2 How to Set the Signal Measurement Method . 5-21 5.5.3 How to Set the Noise Measurement Method .. 5-24 5.5.4 Calculation Method ....................................... 5-28 5.5.5 Procedures ................................................... 5-31

5.6 Measuring Laser Diode Modules ............................... 5-33 5.6.1 How to Set the Signal Measurement Method . 5-35 5.6.2 How to Set the Noise Measurement Method .. 5-39 5.6.3 Calculation Method ....................................... 5-43 5.6.4 Procedures ................................................... 5-45

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier....................................... 5-47 5.7.1 Optical Amplifier Measurement Method ......... 5-47

Page 140: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-2

5.7.2 Optical Amplifier Measurement Screen Display5-53 5.7.3 Measurement With/Without

Spectrum Division Method ............................. 5-54 5.7.4 Measurement Using

Polarization Nulling Method ........................... 5-56 5.7.5 Measurement Using Pulse Method ................ 5-58 5.7.6 Measuring Performance with

Respect to Wavelength Multiplexed Light ...... 5-61 5.7.7 Calculation Method ....................................... 5-64

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex) .................................................................. 5-67 5.8.1 Optical Amplifier (WDM) Screen Display ........ 5-69 5.8.2 How to Set the Signal Measurement

Method.......................................................... 5-71 5.8.3 How to Set the Estimated Noise

Measurement Method ................................... 5-74 5.8.4 Calculation Method ....................................... 5-79 5.8.5 Procedure ..................................................... 5-83

5.9 Measuring WDM Filter .............................................. 5-86 5.9.1 WDM Filter Transmission Characteristics

Measurement Method ................................... 5-87 5.9.2 WDM Filter Screen Display ........................... 5-88 5.9.3 How to Set the WDM Filter

Measurement Method ................................... 5-90 5.9.4 Procedures ................................................... 5-94

Page 141: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.1 Measuring DFB-LD (Distributed Feedback Laser Diode)

5-3

5 M

easurement Functions

5.1 Measuring DFB-LD (Distributed Feedback Laser Diode)

A DFB–LD is a semiconductor laser diode that generates a single spectrum.

The following items can be measured by the DFB-LD measurement functions.

● Peak: Peak wavelength and peak level ● 2nd Peak: Side mode wavelength and level ● SMSR: Side Mode Suppression Ratio ● Mode Offset: Difference between side mode wavelength and

peak wavelength ● Stop Band: Difference between peak wavelength and both

side mode wavelengths ● Center Offset: Difference between peak wavelength and

average of both side mode wavelengths ● σ: Standard deviation ● Kσ: Spectrum width using RMS method ● ndB Width: Spectrum width at specified cut level

Figure 5.1-1 DFB-Test Example

Page 142: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-4

5.1.1 Setting Items This function has following setting items.

● Slice Level This is the threshold value for calculating standard deviation σ.

● Side Mode This selects the detected side mode. 2nd Peak: Next highest peak after maximum peak as side mode Left: Peak at left side of maximum peak as side mode Right: Peak at right side of maximum peak as side mode

● Kσ This sets constant for standard deviation σ K = 2.35 is equivalent to 3 dB down, and K = 6.07 is equivalent to 20 dB down.

● ndB Width This specifies the cut level used for spectrum width measurement. The cut level is an attenuator from the peak level.

● Search Resolution This sets the level resolution (dB) to define the side mode. Peak P1 in the following diagram has ripple P4 of Δl4 dB. If this ripple is evaluated as a side mode, the SMSR is not measured correctly. In this case, if the level resolution is set to a larger value than Δl4 dB, the P4 ripple is not detected and SMSR can be measured.

Figure 5.1.1-1 Example of Waveform where 2nd Peak Not Measured

Correctly

P1

P2 P3

P4 ∆l1

∆l2 ∆l

∆l4

Page 143: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.1 Measuring DFB-LD (Distributed Feedback Laser Diode)

5-5

5 M

easurement Functions

5.1.2 Calculation Method ● σ

This is calculated using the following formula:

22

cn

nn

BB

-λλ

σ=∑

∑ ×

i

ii

n

nn

BBBBBB

BB

c+・・・+

λ+・・・λ+λ=

λ=λ

21

2211

∑∑ ×

where, Bn and λn (n = 1, 2, 3 ….i) is calculated as level and wavelength at the point with a level more than a slice level down from the peak.

● Mode Offset, Stop Band, Center Offset

These are calculated using the following formulae: Mode Offset = λside – λmax

Stop Band = λright – λleft

Center Offset = 2

leftrightaxm

lll

+−

where, λmax is the wavelength at the maximum peak, λleft is the wavelength at the left side of the maximum peak, λright is the wavelength at the right side of the maximum peak, and λside is the side mode wavelength. However, λside is the side mode selected from the side mode settings, 2nd Peak, Left or Right.

Figure 5.1.2-1 Position of Peak Wavelength and Side Mode

lleft lMax lright

Page 144: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-6

5.1.3 Procedure To measure DFB-LD: 1. Input the optical signal. 2. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 3. Press Single to start the measurement. 4. When the name of the F7 horizontal key is not Application, press F8,

and then press F7. 5. Press f1 DFB-LD Test. The measurement result display field is

displayed. 6. Press f1 Slice Level and input the value using the keypad or rotary

knob. The Slice Level setting range is from 0.1 to 50.0 dB. 7. Press f2 Side Mode and select the side mode from f1 to f3. 8. Press f3 Kσ and select the factor of reference deviation using f1 to f5

keys, keypad, or rotary knob. The factor can be entered from 1.00 to 10.00.

For the relationship between factor and level differences, refer to Section 4.5.5 “Analyzing Multiple Spectrum Center Wavelength and Spectrum Width (RMS method) ”.

9. Press f4 ndB Width. Input the cut level (in ndB), using the keypad or rotary knob.

10. When not detecting a side mode properly, press f5 Search Resolution. Search Resolution can be input in the range of 0.10 to 10.00 dB. The level resolution detecting the side mode is set using keypad or rotary knob.

11. Press f7 Off to finish the DFB-LD measurement.

Page 145: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.2 Measuring FP-LD (Fabry-Perot Laser Diode)

5-7

5 M

easurement Functions

5.2 Measuring FP-LD (Fabry-Perot Laser Diode) A Fabry-Perot laser diode is a semiconductor laser diode with a multi mode oscillation in the spectrum.

The following items can be measured by the FP-LD measurement functions.

● Peak: Peak wavelength and peak level ● Mean Wl: Center wavelength ● FWHM: Spectral width using RMS method (2.35 σ) ● Total Power: Spectrum integration power ● Mode ( n dB): Number of longitudinal modes ● Mode Spacing: Interval between longitudinal modes ● σ: Standard deviation of spectrum using RMS

method

Figure 5.2-1 FP-LD Test Example

Page 146: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-8

5.2.1 Setting Items This function has following setting items.

● Slice Level This sets whether or not to find the number of longitudinal modes at levels lowered some dB (Slice level) from the peak.

5.2.2 Calculation Method The following equation is used to calculate the level L1, L2, L3---Ln for all measured wavelengths λ1, λ2, λ3---λn in the spectrum. Here the peak wavelength is bigger than the level lowered the level at Slice Level from the peak of the measurement spectrum.

Figure 5.2.2-1 Wavelength and Level Used for Calculation

● Mean Wl ( )∑

∑ ⋅=

LiiLi

c

ll

● FWHM

( )∑

∑ −==∆

i

cii

LL 2

35.235.2ll

σl

● Total Power ∑= iLPow

L1

L2

L3

L4

Li

l1 l2 l3 l4 … li

Page 147: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.2 Measuring FP-LD (Fabry-Perot Laser Diode)

5-9

5 M

easurement Functions

5.2.3 Procedure To measure Fabry-Perot LD: 1. Input the optical signal. 2. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 3. Press Single to start the measurement. 4. When the name of the F7 horizontal key is not Application, press F8,

and then press F7. 5. Press f2 FP-LD Test to display the measurement result display field. 6. Press f1 Slice Level and input the value using the keypad or rotary

knob. The Slice Level setting range is from 0.1 to 50.0 dB.

7. Press f7 Off to finish the FP-LD measurement.

Page 148: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-10

5.3 Measuring LED (Light Emitting Diode) A light emitting diode is an optical element with a continuous spectrum.

The following items can be measured by the LED measurement functions.

● Peak: Peak wavelength at peak level ● Mean Wl (n dB): Center wavelength using ndB Loss method ● Mean Wl (FWHM): Center wavelength of spectrum half width ● n dB Width: Spectrum width using ndB Loss method ● FWHM (2.35 σ): Spectrum half width using RMS method ● PkDens (/1nm): Maximum spectrum density ● Total Power: Spectrum integral power ● Kσ: Spectrum width using RMS method ● σ: Standard deviation of spectrum using RMS

method

Figure 5.3-1 LED-Test Example

Page 149: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.3 Measuring LED (Light Emitting Diode)

5-11

5 M

easurement Functions

5.3.1 Setting Items This function has following setting items.

● Cut Level This sets the threshold level used to calculate Mean Wl (n dB), ndB Width, and PkDens (/1nm). When calculating Mean Wl (FWHM), FWHM (2.35 σ), Total Power, and σ, all data are used irrespective of Cut Level.

● Power Cal This is the calibration factor used at Total Power calculation.

● Kσ This is the constant for the standard deviation σ.

5.3.2 Calculation Method The following equation is used to calculate the level L1, L2, L3---Ln for all measured wavelengths l1, l2, l3---ln in the spectrum. Here the peak wavelength is bigger than the level lowered the level at Slice Level from the peak of the measurement spectrum.

● Mean Wl (ndB)

2ba

cll

l+

=

la, lb (la<lb) are the wavelengths for the levels at the Cut level below the peak.

Figure 5.3.2-1 Definition of la, and lb

● Mean WL (FWHM)

∑∑ ⋅

=n

nnc L

L ll

● ndB Width ab lll −=∆

● FWHM (2.35 σ)

22

35.235.2 cn

nn

LL

ll

σl −⋅

==∆∑

la lb

Cut Level

Page 150: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-12

● Total Power

( ) ∑⋅⋅−

⋅= nLActResSampl

SpanPowerCalPow a1

Span: Span (nm) Sampl: Sampling point ActRes: Actual Resolution α: Equipment dependent power correction coefficient

● PkDens (1nm)

( ) ∑+

⋅⋅−

⋅=nmp

nmpnL

ActResSamplSpanPowerCalPkDens

5.0

5.01)nm1(/

l

l

a

lp: Mean Wl (n dB) wavelength ● σ

22

cn

cn

LL

ll

σ −⋅

=∑

● Kσ σKσK ·=

5.3.3 Procedure 1. Input the optical signal. 2. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 3. Press Single to start the measurement. 4. When the name of the F7 horizontal key is not Application, press F8,

and then press F7. 5. Press f3 LED Test to display the measurement result display field. 6. Press f1 Cut Level and input the value using the keypad or rotary

knob. The Cut Level setting range is from 0.1 to 50.0 dB.

7. Press f2 Power Cal and input the corrected value of the total power using the keypad and rotary knob. The Power Cal setting range is from –10.00 to 10.00 dB.

8. Press f3 Kσ and select the factor of reference deviation using f1 to f5 keys, keypad, or rotary knob. The factor can be entered from 1.00 to 10.00. When measuring the full half width (FWHM), set 2.35 σ.

9. Press f7 Off to finish the optical diode measurement.

Page 151: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.4 Measuring PMD (Polarization Mode Dispersion)

5-13

5 M

easurement Functions

5.4 Measuring PMD (Polarization Mode Dispersion) Polarization Mode Dispersion is a phenomenon that widens the width of optical pulses due to differences in transmission speed between two polarization modes when an optical pulse is passed through optical fiber and optical equipment.

Figure 5.4-1 Outline of PMD

The PMD measurement function measures the Diff Group Delay (differential group delay). Note:

Accurate measurement is not possible for fiber installations in unstable environments, such as in air.

The Diff Group Delay cannot be measured, if the multiplex peak wavelengths do not exist in the spectrum as shown in Figure 5.4-2.

Polarization axis 1

Polarization axis 2 Difference

between polarization components

Input optical pulse

Optical input polarization axis 1 component

Optical input polarization axis 2 components

Optical pulse after passage thru fiber/part

Optical fiber/part

Page 152: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-14

Figure 5.4-2 PMD-Test Example

5.4.1 Setting Items This function has following setting items.

● Auto/Manual This sets the method for capturing the following values used in the calculation.

● First Peak Wavelength in analysis range (1st Peak Wavelength) ● Last Peak Wavelength in analysis range (Last Peak Wavelength) ● Peak Count included in analysis range (Peak Count)

Auto: Detects 1st Peak, Last Peak, and Peak Count

automatically Manual: Sets 1st Peak, Last Peak, and Peak Count manually.

● Mode Cpl Factor

This sets the mode connection factor. ● 1st Peak Marker

This sets the position of the 1st Peak Marker at Manual measurement. ● Last Peak Marker

This sets the position of Last Peak Marker at Manual setting. ● Peak Count

This sets the number of peaks included between the 1st Peak Marker and Last Peak Marker at Manual measurement.

Page 153: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.4 Measuring PMD (Polarization Mode Dispersion)

5-15

5 M

easurement Functions

5.4.2 Calculation Method The differential group delay Δτ is calculated using the following equation.

)12(21)1(ll

llτ−×

××−×=∆

cnk

k: Mode coupling factor c: Light Velocity 2.99792458 × 108 m/s n: Peak Count λ1: 1st Peak Marker wavelength λ2: Last Peak Marker wavelength

The measurement system is shown in the following diagram. A SLD (Super Luminescent Diode) light source or an ASE (Amplified Spontaneous Emission) light source can be used as the wideband light source.

Figure 5.4.2-1 PMD Measurement System

5.4.3 Procedures To display polarization mode measurement 1. When the name of the F7 horizontal key is not Application, press F8,

and then press F7. 2. Press f4 PMD Test to display the measurement result display field. To calculate automatically 1. Press f1 Auto/Manual and select Auto. 2. Input the optical signal. 3. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 4. Press Repeat. 5. Adjust the polarization controller to maximize the difference between

the measured spectrum maximum and minimum values. 6. Press f2 Mode Cpl Factor and input the mode coupling factor in the

range 0.01 to 1.00.

A

A: Analyzer P: Polarizer Q: 1/4 Wavelength board H: 1/2 Wavelength board

Wideband light

source

DUT (Optical fiber cable, etc) Polarization

controller P Q H MS9740B

Optical Spectrum Analyzer

Page 154: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-16

7. The measurement results are updated at each measurement. 8. Press f7 Off to finish the polarization mode dispersion measurement. To calculate manually 1. Press f1 Auto/Manual and select Manual. 2. Input the optical signal. 3. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 4. Press Repeat. 5. Adjust the polarization controller to maximize the difference between

the measured spectrum maximum and minimum values. 6. Press f2 Mode Cpl Factor and input the mode coupling factor in the

range 0.01 to 1.00. 7. Press f3 1st Peak Marker and use the keypad or rotary knob to move

Wavelength Marker A to the peak point. 8. Press f4 Last Peak Marker and use the keypad or rotary knob to move

Wavelength Marker B to the peak point. 9. Press f5 Peak Count and input the number of peak points between

the First Peak Marker and Last Peak Marker. This value includes the peaks at the markers.

10. The measurement results (Diff Group Delay) are updated at each measurement.

11. Press f7 Off to finish the polarization mode dispersion measurement.

Figure 5.4.3-1 Peak Count Example

4

2

3 1

5

1st Peak Marker

Last Peak Marker

Peak Count = 5

Page 155: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals

5-17

5 M

easurement Functions

5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals

Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) is a method for increasing the communication capacity of an optical fiber by using multiple wavelengths in one fiber. The WDM light is composed of multiple optical signals. At WDM measurement, the following items are measured simultaneously for the multiple optical signals.

Table 5.5-1 WDM Measurement Items

Measurement Item Screen Display Description Signal Gain Vari Level difference maximum and

minimum signal levels Level (dBm) Level Lvl-Ref (dB) Ratio of level difference to

reference signal No Number of signal (sequential

number added from short wavelength)

Peak Count Signal count Signal Wl (nm)

/Wl (nm) Wavelength

Spacing Frq (GHz)

Frequency difference between signals

Spacing (nm) Spacing Wl (nm)

Wavelength difference between signals

Wl-Ref (nm) Ratio of wavelength difference to reference signal

SNR SNR Signal Noise Ratio SNR (/*.*nm) Signal noise ratio for the noise

level per noise BW Noise L/R or Blank SNR Noise detection direction

(L = left, R = right A = mean.) No display when Noise Detection Type set to Area

Page 156: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-18

5.5.1 WDM Measurement Screen Display WDM measurement has four types of measurement screens.

The displayed measurement result items differ according to the screen display.

: Displays –: Does not display

Table 5.5.1-1 Items Displayed on the WDM Screen

Item Screen Display

Multi Peak SNR Relative Table

Gain Vari – – L/R – *1 – *1 Level (dBm) – Lvl-Ref (dB) – – – No. Peak Count Signal Frq (GHz) – – – Signal Wl (nm) – – – SNR – *2 – *2 SNR (/*.*nm) – *3 – *3 Spacing (nm) – – – Spacing Wl (nm) – – Spacing Frq (GHz) – – – Wl (nm) Wl-Ref (nm) – – –

*1: When Noise Detection Type set to Point *2: When Noise Normalization set to Off *3: When Noise Normalization set to On Note:

Note that for Level (dBm) at SNR and Table, noise level is subtracted. When a marker is set to Peak, the values of marker level and Level (dBm) may not match.

Level (dBm) at MultiPeak is peak maker level.

Level (dBm) at Relative is the relative value from peak maker level.

Page 157: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals

5-19

5 M

easurement Functions

Multi Peak: Up to 15 wavelengths and levels are displayed on one screen.

Figure 5.5.1-1 Multi Peak Display Example

SNR: Up to 8 wavelengths, levels and signal noises are displayed on one screen.

Figure 5.5.1-2 SNR Display Example

Page 158: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-20

Relative: Up to 5 wavelengths, spacing, wavelength-references, levels, and Level-references are displayed on one screen.

Figure 5.5.1-3 WDM Relative Display Example

Table: Up to 16 wavelengths, frequencies, levels, signal noises, wavelength intervals and spacing intervals are displayed on one screen.

Figure 5.5.1-4 WDM Table Display Example

Page 159: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals

5-21

5 M

easurement Functions

5.5.2 How to Set the Signal Measurement Method In the Signal Parameter dialog box, set the signal detection range (S.Level) and wavelength/level detection method.

Figure 5.5.2-1 Signal Parameter Dialog Box

Table 5.5.2-1 Setting Range of the Parameters in the Signal Parameter

Dialog Box

Item Min. Max. Unit Cut Level 0.1 50.0 dB Search Threshold 0.01 10.0 dB Signal Span 0.01 50.00 nm S.Level 0.1 50.0 dB

Page 160: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-22

● S.Level (Slice Level) This sets the optical signal detection level range and detects peaks above the lower level of the S. Level band below the Peak level as WDM signals. Peaks b, c, d, and e in the following diagram are detected.

Figure 5.5.2-2 WDM Analysis Target Peaks

Note: Peak level is the sum of optical signal level and noise level.

● Wavelength Detection Type: Detection type of Signal wavelength Peak: Wavelength peaks Threshold: Center wavelength analyzed Threshold Threshold Cut Level: Detects peak as signal and level range from maximum. This parameter is enabled when Threshold is selected. Threshold Cut Level is set in the range of 0.1 to 50.0.

Note:

If no wavelength is detected within the level range specified by Threshold Cut Level, the screen center wavelength becomes the detected wavelength.

Figure 5.5.2-3 Measurement Method for Signal Wavelength

Peak Level Slice Level

a

b c d

e

When Peak is selected Cut Level

Signal Wl: Peak Wavelength

When Threshold is selected

Signal Wl: Center Wavelength of Threshold Level

Threshold Level

Page 161: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals

5-23

5 M

easurement Functions

● Level Detection Type: Detection type of Signal level Point: Point level for Signal wavelength ΣPower: Total level for Signal Span wavelength range Signal Span is set in the range of 0.01 to 50.00.

Figure 5.5.2-4 Measurement Method for Signal Level

The optical signal level when Point is set (LS,Lin) is calculated by the following formula:

)()(, sigsigLinS NPL ll −= (W)

P(λsig): Level at detected optical signal wavelength N(λsig): Noise level at detected optical signal wavelength When ΣPower is set, the optical signal level is calculated by the following formula:

)(*

1*)}()({

1, iesActRSampl

SpanNiPLn

isigLinS

al−

−= ∑=

(W)

n: Data count in the range of Signal Span Span: Span (nm) Sampl: Sampling point P(i): ith data level (W) ActRes(i): ith data Actual Resolution α: Equipment dependent power correction

coefficient Note:

When the wavelength range set at Signal Span does not fit within the screen, only the data for the on-screen wavelength range is totaled.

At Point

Signal Span

Level: Level at Signal Wl point

At ΣPower

Level: Integral value in the range of Signal Span

Signal Wl

Signal Wl

Page 162: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-24

5.5.3 How to Set the Noise Measurement Method In the Noise Parameter dialog box, set the noise level for the SNR measurement and display/detection method.

Figure 5.5.3-1 Noise Parameter Dialog Box

Table 5.5.3-1 Setting Range of the Parameters in the Noise Parameter

Dialog Box

Item Min. Max. Unit Fitting Span 0.01 20.00 nm Masked Span 0.01 20.00 nm Noise BW 0.1 1.0 nm Noise Position 0.01 100.00 nm Span 0.01 100.00 nm

Page 163: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals

5-25

5 M

easurement Functions

● Normalization: Calculation method for noise level Off: Level in the wavelength range for the actual resolution On: Normalized level in the wavelength range of the Noise BW Noise BW: Band width used for noise level calculation.

● Detection Type: Detection method for noise level

Area: The noise obtained from the value of fitting curve at signal wavelength. The fitting curve is calculated from the noise waveform in the Noise Area

Point: Noise measured at point specified at Noise Point

Figure 5.5.3-2 Detection Method for Noise Level

When Detection Type is set to Point, the position for measuring noise level can be set by f6 Noise Position. ● Noise Position On: When the Noise Parameter Point is set to Left, the position is

separated by wavelength difference Δλ on the shorter wavelength side of the optical signal wavelength λs. When Point is set to Right, the position is separated by wavelength difference Δλ on the longer wavelength side of the optical signal wavelength λs. When Point is set to Higher, the position is at the higher level of the wavelength difference Δλ on the left or right side of the optical signal wavelength λs (left side in Figure 5.5.3-3 (b)). When Point is set to (L+R)/2, the position is at the average of the levels of the wavelength difference Δλ on the left and right sides of the optical signal wavelength λs.

Off: When the Noise Parameter Point is set to Left, the position is at the dip level on the shorter wavelength side of the optical signal.

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l

(a) Area

ls

Calculation range

(b) Point

Fitting Curve

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l

ls

Left Noise level

Right Noise level

(L + R)/2 Noise level Noise level

Page 164: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-26

When Point is set to Right, the position is at the dip level on the longer wavelength side of the optical signal. When Point is set to Higher, the position is at the higher level of the dip points on the left or right side of the optical signal (left in Figure 5.5.3-3 (a)). When Point is set to (L+R)/2, the position is at the average of the levels of the dip points on the left and right sides of the optical signal.

Figure 5.5.3-3 Measurement of Noise at Noise Position

● Point: Noise level detection position when Detection Type is Point Higher: Higher level at left or right side of signal

wavelength Left: Signal left side (short wavelength side) Right: Signal right side (long wavelength side) (L+R)/2: Average level of Signal left and right sides

● Area:

Fitting curve calculation range when Detection Type is Area Fitting Curve: Type of fitting curve Linear: Linear equation for noise linear data

f (λ) = aλ + b Gauss: Binomial equation for noise log data

f (λ) = aλ2 + bλ + c 3rd POLY: Third-order polynomial equation for noise linear

data f (λ) = aλ3 + bλ2 + cλ + d

4th POLY: Forth-order polynomial equation for noise linear data f (λ) = aλ4 + bλ3 + cλ2 + dλ + e

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l

(a) Noise Position Of

ls

Left Noise level

(b) Noise Position On

Right Noise level

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l

ls −∆l ls

Left Noise level

Right Noise level

Page 165: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals

5-27

5 M

easurement Functions

5th POLY: Fifth-order polynomial equation for noise linear data f (λ) = aλ5 + bλ4 + cλ3 + dλ2 + eλ + f

Fitting Curve Display: Fitting curve display setting

Off: Does not display fitting curve on screen On: Displays fitting curve on screen Area Type: Area setting method for calculating fitting curve Channel: Both sides of each Signal wavelength User Specify: User specified range Channel: Area setting when Noise Area is Channel Fitting Span: Wavelength range for calculating fitting curve Masked Span: Wavelength range excluded from fitting curve

calculation User Specify: Area setting when Noise Area is User Specify Noise Position: Wavelength difference between screen center

wavelength and area center wavelength Span: Area wavelength range

Figure 5.5.3-4 Noise Level Measurement Range Set at Area Type

Note:

When the wavelength range set at Channel or User Specify cannot be accommodated within the measured wavelength range, the fitting curve is calculated using only the measured wavelength range data.

When the wavelength range set at Channel or User Specify is outside the measured wavelength range, SNR is displayed as *** and no fitting curve is displayed.

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l (dB

m)

(a) Channel

Signal Wl

(b) User Specify

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l (dB

m)

Noise Position (left)

Noise Position (right)

Center Wavelength

Span

Span

Fitting Span

Masked Span

Page 166: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-28

5.5.4 Calculation Method 1. Peaks with a level higher than the level set by S. Level setting of

Signal Parameter are detected and analyzed. 2. The WDM signal wavelength is measured in accordance with the

Wavelength-Detection Type setting of Signal Parameter. 3. The WDM signal peak level is measured in accordance with the

Level-Detection Type of Signal Parameter. WDM signal peak level is the sum of signal level and noise level. WDM signal level is determined by “WDM signal peak level – Noise level (the level determined in step 5)”. See Figure 5.5.4-1, and Figure 5.5.4-2.

4. The noise measurement position and range are determined in accordance with the Noise Parameter Detection Type and Noise Position settings.

Table 5.5.4-1 Noise Measuring Point

Noise Parameter Detection Type Noise

Position Noise

Parameter Area Type

Position or

Area Point Off – Figure 5.5.3-3 (a) On – Figure 5.5.3-3 (b) Area – Channel Figure 5.5.3-4 (a) – User Specify Figure 5.5.3-4 (b)

5. When the Noise Parameter Detection Type is Point, the level at the

position set at Noise Position is measured. When the Noise Parameter Detection Type is Area, the fitting curve specified at Fitting Curve is calculated. The level at the fitting curve WDM signal wavelength is measured.

Figure 5.5.4-1 Fitting Curve and Noise Level When Area Type is Channel

Ps1+Pn1

Pn1

Wl1 Wl2 Wl3

Ps2+Pn2 Ps3+Pn3

Pn2 Pn3

Leve

l

Wavelength (nm)

Wl1,Wl2,Wl3:Signal wavelength Ps1,Ps2,Ps3:Signal level Pn1,Pn2,Pn 3:Noise level

Page 167: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals

5-29

5 M

easurement Functions

Figure 5.5.4-2 Fitting Curve and Noise Level when Area Type is User Specify

6. SNR is calculated using the following equation.

=

)(log10 ,

sig

LinS

NL

SNRl

(dB)

where, LSLin is linear value (W) of level at signal and N(λsig) is linear value (W) of noise level at optical signal wavelength. When Level Detection Type is set to Point, the optical signal level is calculated by the following formula:

)()(, sigsigLins NPL ll −= (W)

P(λsig): linear value (W) of level at optical signal wavelength

When Level Detection Type is set to ΣPower, the optical signal level is calculated by the following formula:

)(*

1*)}()({

1, iesActRSampl

SpanNiPLn

isigLinS

al−

−= ∑=

(W)

n: Data count in the range of Signal Span Span: Span (nm) Sampl: Sampling point P(i): ith data level (W) ActRes(i): ith data Actual Resolution α: Equipment dependent power correction coefficient

Ps1+Pn1

Pn1

Ps2+Pn2 Ps3+Pn3

Pn2 Pn3

Wl1 Wl2 Wl3

Leve

l

Wavelength (nm)

Wl1,Wl2,Wl3:Signal wavelength Ps1,Ps2,Ps3:Signal level Pn1,Pn2,Pn 3:Noise level

Page 168: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-30

7. When Normalization at Noise Parameter is set to On, the noise level is normalized in the wavelength range set at Noise BW to calculate the noise level per *.* nm. SNR is calculated for this noise level.

′=

)(log10 ,

sig

LinS

NL

SNRl

(dB-nm)

N’(λsig): Linear value of noise normalized by Noise BW (W/nm)

N (lsig) a )( sigN l′ = · NBW (W/nm) ActRes(lsig)

ActRes(λsig): Actual resolution (nm) at optical signal wavelength NBW: Noise BW

Page 169: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.5 Measuring WDM (Wavelength Division Multiplexed) Signals

5-31

5 M

easurement Functions

5.5.5 Procedures To measure WDM 1. When the name of the F7 horizontal key is not Application, press F8,

and then press F7. 2. Press f5 WDM Test to display the measurement result display field. 3. Input the optical signal. 4. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 5. Press Single to start the measurement. 6. Press f3 Display Mode. 7. Set the display method using f1 to f4. 8. Press f4 Signal Parameter. 9. Set the following items in the dialog box:

S.Level: A range of 0.1 to 50.0 dB can be input. Search Threshold: A range of 0.01 to 10.0 dB can be input. Wavelength-Detection Type: When Threshold is set, Threshold Cut Level is used to detect wavelength. Input the Threshold Cut Level in the range of 0.1 to 50 dB. Level-Detection Type: When ΣPower is set, Signal Span is used to calculate power. Input Signal Span in the range of 0.01 to 50.00 nm.

10. Press f7 Set to update the value in the measurement result field. 11. When not wanting to display any wavelength data on the screen,

press f1 Next Page or f2 Last Page. 12. Press f7 Off to finish the WDM measurement.

Page 170: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-32

To set Noise Level when SNR displayed 1. Press f5 Noise Parameter. 2. Set the following items in the dialog box:

Normalization: When On is set, Noise BW is used to calculate noise level. Input a value for Noise BW in the range of 0.1 to 1.0 nm.

Detection Type: Sets Area or Point. Area: When Area is set at Detection Type, set the

fitting curve and measurement area. Point: When Point is set at Detection Type, set the

measurement position. 3. Press f7 Set to update the value in the measurement result display

field. 4. When Point is set at Detection Type in step 2, press f6 Noise Position

when setting the wavelength difference for measuring noise. When Area is set at Detection Type, f6 Noise Position cannot be set.

5. Input the wavelength difference (Noise Position) using the keypad or the rotary knob. The setting range is 0.01 to 20.0 nm. The value in the measurement display field is displayed.

6. When setting the wavelength difference, press f1 On. When not setting the wavelength difference, press f2 Off.

To set reference wavelength and display range when Relative displayed 1. Press f5 Ref No. 2. Set the reference wavelength number using the keypad or the rotary

knob. Input a value from 1 to the Peak Count. When setting the wavelength number, the marker moves to the wavelength and level for that number and the values in the measurement results display field are updated.

3. Press f6 Top Page No. 4. Set the wavelength number to be displayed in the top line of the

measurement results using the keypad or the rotary knob. Input a value from 1 to the Peak Count. When setting the wavelength number, up to five measurement results from that number are displayed.

Page 171: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.6 Measuring Laser Diode Modules

5-33

5 M

easurement Functions

5.6 Measuring Laser Diode Modules When using the laser diode module measurement function, the following items are measured.

● Signal: Signal wavelength and signal level Signal level varies according to the SignalLevel settings made in the Signal Parameter dialog box.

● Peak: Peak signal wavelength and peak signal level ● Slice Level: This is the threshold value for calculating standard

deviation σ. ● SMSR: Side mode wavelength and level ● 2nd Peak: SMSR (Side Mode Suppression Ratio) ● Mode Offset: Difference between side mode wavelength and peak

wavelength (Mode Offset) ● SNR (Res **nm): Signal to noise ratio (actual measured value)

The measured noise level is used to calculate SNR. ● SNR (/*.*nm): SNR (Conversion value per Noise Span)

Uses noise level per noise bandwidth in SNR calculation

● σ: Standard deviation of spectrum using RMS method ● Kσ: Spectrum width

K = 2.35 is equivalent to 3 dB down and K = 6.07 is equivalent to 20 dB down.

● ndB Width: Spectrum width at specified cut level ● Stop Band: Difference between peak wavelength and both side

mode wavelengths ● Center Offset: Difference between peak wavelength and average of

both side mode wavelengths

Page 172: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-34

Figure 5.6-1 LD Module-Test Example

Page 173: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.6 Measuring Laser Diode Modules

5-35

5 M

easurement Functions

5.6.1 How to Set the Signal Measurement Method In the Signal Parameter dialog box, set the level range and wavelength/level detection method.

● SMSR Parameter This selects the detection method for the Side Mode. 2nd Peak: Peak with next highest level after maximum

peak becomes side mode Left: Peak to left adjacent side of maximum peak

becomes side mode Right: Peal to right adjacent side of maximum peak

becomes side mode ● Kσ

This sets constant for standard deviation σ K = 2.35 is equivalent to 3 dB down,and K = 6.07 is equivalent to 20 dB down.

● ndB Width This specifies the cut level used for spectrum width measurement. The cut level is an attenuator from the peak level.

● Search Resolution This sets the level resolution (dB) to define the side mode. Peak P1 in the following diagram has ripple P4 of Δl4 dB. If this ripple is evaluated as a side mode, the SMSR is not measured correctly. In this case, if the level resolution is set to a larger value than Δl4 dB, the P4 ripple is not detected and SMSR can be measured.

Figure 5.6.1-1 Example of Waveform where 2nd Peak Not Measured

Correctly

P1

P2 P3

P4 ∆l1

∆l2 ∆l3

∆l4

Page 174: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-36

● Signal Parameter The Signal Parameter dialog box sets the level range to calculate standard deviation (Slice Level), and wavelength/level detection method.

Figure 5.6.1-2 Signal Parameter Dialog Box

Table 5.6.1-1 Setting Range of the Parameters in the Signal Parameter

Dialog Box

Item Min. Max. Unit Cut Level 0.1 50.0 dB Signal Span 0.01 50.00 nm

Wavelength Detection Type: Detection method for Signal wavelength Peak: Wavelength peaks Threshold: Center wavelength for Threshold analysis Threshold Cut Level: Level differential from maximum which peaks

are detected as signal. This value is effective when selecting Threshold at Detection Type. Threshold Cut Level can be set in the range from 0.1 to 50.0.

Page 175: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.6 Measuring Laser Diode Modules

5-37

5 M

easurement Functions

Note: The center wavelength on the screen becomes the detection wavelength if the wavelength is not detected in the range of level set at Threshold Cut Level.

Figure 5.6.1-3 Measurement Method for Wavelength

Level Detection Type: Detection method for signal level Point: Point level for Signal wavelength ΣPower: Detects Integrated level for Signal Span

wavelength range Signal Span can be set in the range from 0.01 to 50.00. Signal Level: Calculation method of signal level (See below.)

[Signal – Noise]: Measurement Level* – Noise Level [Signal]: Measurement Level*

Figure 5.6.1-4 Measurement Method for Level

At Peak Cut level

Signal Wl: Peak wavelength

At Threshold

Signal Wl: Center wavelength of

threshold level

Threshold level

At Point

Signal Span

Level*: Level at Signal Wl point

At ΣPower

Level*: Integral level in range of Signal Span

Signal Wl

Signal Wl

Page 176: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-38

When Level Detection Type is set to Point, the optical signal level (LS,Lin) is calculated by the following formula: When the Signal Level is set at [Signal],

)(, sigLinS PL l= (W) When the Signal Level is set at [Signal–Noise],

)()(, sigsigLinS NPL ll −= (W) P(λsig): level at detected optical signal wavelength N(λsig): noise level at optical signal wavelength When Level Detection Type is set to ΣPower, the optical signal level is calculated by the following formula: When the Signal Level is set at [Signal],

)(*

1*)}({

1, iesActRSampl

SpaniPLn

iLinS

a−

= ∑=

(W)

When the Signal Level is set at [Signal–Noise],

)(*

1*)}()({

1, iesActRSampl

SpanNiPLn

isigLinS

al−

−= ∑=

(W)

n: Data count in the range of Signal Span Span: Span (nm) Sampl: Sampling point P(i): ith data level (W) ActRes(i): ith data Actual Resolution α: Equipment dependent power correction coefficient

Note:

When the wavelength range set at Signal Span cannot be accommodated within the screen, only the data for the on-screen wavelength range is totaled.

Page 177: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.6 Measuring Laser Diode Modules

5-39

5 M

easurement Functions

5.6.2 How to Set the Noise Measurement Method In the Noise Parameter dialog box, set the noise level for the SNR measurement and detection method.

Figure 5.6.2-1 Noise Parameter Dialog Box

Table 5.6.2-1 Setting Range of the Parameters in the Noise Parameter

Dialog Box

Item Min. Max. Unit Fitting Span 0.01 20.00 nm Masked Span 0.01 20.00 nm Noise BW 0.1 1.0 nm Noise Position 0.01 100.00 nm Span 0.01 100.00 nm

Noise BW : Band width used for noise level calculation Detection Type: Detection method for noise level Area: Noise obtained from value of fitting curve at signal wavelength.

The fitting curve is calculated from the noise waveform in the Noise Area

Point: Noise measured at position specified at Noise Point

Page 178: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-40

Figure 5.6.2-2 Detection Method for Noise Level

When Detection Type is set to Point, the position for measuring noise level can be set by f3 Noise Position. Noise Position On: When the Noise Parameter Point is set to Left, the position is

separated by wavelength difference Δλ on the shorter wavelength side of the optical signal wavelength λs. When Point is set to Right, the position is separated by wavelength differenceΔλ on the longer wavelength side of the optical signal wavelength λs. When Point is set to Higher, the position is at the higher level of the wavelength differenceΔλ on the left or right side of the optical signal wavelength λs (left side in Figure 5.6.2-3 (b)). When Point is set to (L+R)/2, the position is at the average of the levels of the wavelength differenceΔλ on the left and right sides of the optical signal wavelength λs.

Off: When the Noise Parameter Point is set to Left, the position is at the dip level on the shorter wavelength side of the optical signal. When Point is set to Right, the position is at the dip level on the longer wavelength side of the optical signal. When Point is set to Higher, the position is at the higher level of the dip points on the left or right side of the optical signal (left in Figure 5.6.2-3 (a)). When Point is set to (L+R)/2, the position is at the average of the levels of the dip points on the left and right sides of the optical signal.

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l

(a) Area

ls

Calculation range

(b) Point

Fitting curve

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l

ls

Left Noise level

Right Noise level

(L + R)/2 Noise level

Noise level

Page 179: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.6 Measuring Laser Diode Modules

5-41

5 M

easurement Functions

Figure 5.6.2-3 Measurement of Noise at Noise Position

Point: Noise level detection point when Detection Type is Point Higher: Higher level at left side or right side of signal wavelength Left: Signal left side (short wavelength side) Right: Signal right side (long wavelength side) (L+R)/2: Average level of Signal left and right sides Area: Fitting curve calculation range when Detection Type is Area Fitting Curve: Type of fitting curve Linear: Linear equation for noise linear data

f (λ) = aλ + b Gauss: Binomial equation for noise log data

f (λ) = aλ2 + bλ + c 3rd POLY: Third-order polynomial equation for noise linear data

f (λ) = aλ3 + bλ2 + cλ + d 4th POLY: Forth-order polynomial equation for noise linear data

f (λ) = aλ4 + bλ3 + cλ2 + dλ + e 5th POLY: Fifth-order polynomial equation for noise linear data

f (λ) = aλ5 + bλ4 + cλ3 + dλ2 + eλ + f Fitting Curve Display: Fitting curve display setting Off: Does not display fitting curve on screen On: Displays fitting curve on screen Area Type Area setting method for calculating fitting curve Channel: Symmetrical area to Signal wavelength User Specify: User specified range by left and right side of Signal

Wavelength

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l

(a) Noise Position Off

ls

Left Noise level

(b) Noise Position On

Right Noise level

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l

ls –∆l ls ls +∆l

Left Noise level

Right Noise level

Page 180: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-42

Channel: Area setting when Noise Area is Channel Fitting Span: Wavelength range for calculating fitting curve Masked Span: Wavelength range excluded from fitting curve calculation User Specify: Area setting when Noise Area is User Specify Noise Position: Wavelength difference between screen center wavelength

and area center wavelength Span: Area wavelength range

Figure 5.6.2-4 Noise Level Measurement Range Set at Area Type

Note:

When the wavelength range set at Channel or User Specify cannot be accommodated within the measured wavelength range, the fitting curve is calculated using only the measured wavelength range data.

When the wavelength range set at Channel or User Specify is outside the measured wavelength range, SNR is displayed as *** and no fitting curve is displayed.

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l (dB

m)

(a) Channel

Signal Wl

(b) User Specify

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l (dB

m)

Noise Position (left)

Noise Position (right)

Center Wavelength

Span

Span

Fitting Span

Masked Span

Page 181: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.6 Measuring Laser Diode Modules

5-43

5 M

easurement Functions

5.6.3 Calculation Method 1. The peak level of waveform is detected. 2. The side mode wavelength and level are measured in accordance

with the Search Resolution. 3. SMSR is measured in accordance with the SMSR Parameter. 4. Mode Offset, Stop Band, Center Offset are calculated.

Processing is performed as follows where the wavelength of the maximum peak is λmax, the wavelengths on both sides of the maximum peak are λleft and λright,and the side mode wavelength is λside. Mode Offset = λside – λmax

Stop Band = λright – λleft

Center Offset = 2+ leftright

max

λλ-λ

However, λside is the side mode selected at Side Mode 2nd Peak, Left, or Right.

Figure 5.6.3-1 Position of Peak Wavelength and Side Modes

5. σ is calculated as follows where Bn and λn (n = 1, 2, 3 ….i) is measured level and wavelength at the point with a level more than a slice level down from the peak.

22

cBn

nBn-λ

λσ=

∑∑ ×

BiBBiBiBB

BnnBn

c+・・・+

λ+・・・λ+λ=

λ=λ

212211

∑∑ ×

6. Spectrum width is calculated in accordance with the Kσ. 7. The Signal wavelength is measured in accordance with the

Wavelength-Detection Type setting of Signal Parameter. 8. The Signal level is measured in accordance with the Level-Detection

Type of Signal Parameter.

lleft lMax lright

Page 182: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-44

9. The noise measurement position and range are determined in accordance with the Noise Parameter Detection Type and Noise Position settings.

Table 5.6.3-1 Noise Measuring Point

Noise Parameter Detection Type

Noise Position

Noise Parameter Area Type

Position or

Area Point Off – Figure 5.6.2-3 (a) On – Figure 5.6.2-3 (b) Area – Channel Figure 5.6.2-4 (a) – User Specify Figure 5.6.2-4 (b)

10. When the Noise Parameter Detection Type is Point, the level at the

position set at Noise Position is measured. When the Noise Parameter Detection Type is Area, the fitting curve specified at Fitting Curve is calculated. The level at the fitting curve WDM signal wavelength is measured.

11. SNR (signal to noise ratio) is calculated by the following formula. SNR (Res ***nm) is calculated by the following formula.

=

)(log10 ,

sig

LinS

NL

SNRl

(dB)

When the Noise Parameter Detection Type is set to Point,

)()(, sigsigLinS NPL ll −= (W)

P(λsig): level at detected optical signal wavelength N(λsig): noise level at optical signal wavelength

When the Noise Parameter Detection Type is set to ΣPower,

)(*

1*)}()({

1, iesActRSampl

SpanNiPLn

isigLinS

al−

−= ∑=

n: Data count in the range of Signal Span Span: Span (nm) Sampl: Sampling point P (i): ith data level (W) ActRes (i): ith data Actual Resolution α: Equipment dependent power correction coefficient N (λsig): Linear value (W) of noise level at optical signal

wavelength

Page 183: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.6 Measuring Laser Diode Modules

5-45

5 M

easurement Functions

SNR (/ *.*nm) means Signal to Noise Ratio per Noise BW. SNR (/ *.*nm) is calculated using the following equation:

=)(

log10 ,

sig

LinS

NL

SNRl

(dB-nm)

N’(λsig): Linear value (W) of noise level normalized by Noise BW

N (lsig) a )( sigN l′ = · NBW (W/nm) ActRes(lsig)

ActRes(λsig): Actual resolution (nm) at optical signal wavelength

NBW: Noise BW Note:

With the SNR measurement, Ls,Lin in the SNR calculation formula is the value subtracting the noise level, regardless of the Signal Level settings of Signal Parameter.

5.6.4 Procedures To measure laser diode module 1. Input the optical signal in the MS9740B. 2. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 3. Press Single to start the measurement. 4. When the name of the F7 horizontal key is not Application, press F8,

and then press F7. 5. Press f6 LD Module Test to display the measurement result display

field. 6. Press f1 Signal Parameter. 7. Specify the wavelength and level measurement method using the

arrow keys or rotary knob. 8. Press f7 Set to update the value in the measurement result display

field. 9. Press f2 Noise Parameter. 10. Specify the noise measurement method using the arrow keys or

rotary knob. 11. Press f7 Set to update the value in the measurement result display

field. 12. Press f3 Noise Position. 13. Set the difference in wavelength between the wavelength where the

noise level is measured and the wavelength of the optical signal. For the measurement location of noise level, refer to Figure 5.6.2-3.

Page 184: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-46

14. f1 On: Sets wavelength difference On. Use the rotary knob or the ten numeric keys to input the wavelength difference for noise measurement. The wavelength difference is input in the range 0.01 to 20 nm. f2 Off: Sets wavelength difference Off. The position for measuring noise level is set automatically. The minimum level between adjacent optical signals is the noise.

15. Press f7 More 1/2. 16. Press f1 Slice Level. Enter the slice level value using the rotary knob

or keypad. The slice level input range is 0.1 to 50 dB. 17. Press f2 SMSR Parameter. 18. Select the side mode searching method using f1 to f3:

● 2nd Peak: High side mode with next highest level after maximum level

● Left Peak point at maximum level shorter wavelength side ● Right Peak point at maximum level longer wavelength side

19. Press f3 Kσ and input the ratio of reference deviation using f1 to f5 keys, the keypad, or rotary knob. The factor can be entered from 1 to 10. For the relationship between factor and level differences, refer to 4.5.5 “Analyzing Multiple Spectrum Center Wavelength and Spectrum Width (RMS Method).”

20. Press f4 ndB Width. Input the cut level (in ndB), using the keypad or rotary knob.

21. Press f5 Search Resolution. Enter the value using the rotary knob or keypad. Search Resolution can be input in the range of 0.1 to 10.0 dB.

22. Press f6 Off to finish the laser diode module measurement. Note:

When measuring faceted light sources such as LEDs, VCSELs, etc., set MM Mode to On.

For the precautions when using multimode fiber, refer to 2.7 “Precautions at Measurement”.

Page 185: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier

5-47

5 M

easurement Functions

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier 5.7.1 Optical Amplifier Measurement Method

The following items can be measured by the optical amplifier functions.

● NF: Noise figure ● Gain: Gain ● Signal Wl: Amplified optical peak wavelength ● ASE Lvl/(Res): ASE level for amplified light ● Pin Lvl: Signal level input ● Pout Lvl: Signal level output The noise figure and gain are calculated from the power of the optical input to the optical amplifier (Pin), the power of the optical signal output from the optical amplifier (Pout), and the ASE level (Pase). For the calculation formula, refer to 5.7.7 “Calculation Method”.

Pin, Pout, and Pase are measured from the optical input to the optical amplifier and the spectrum of the optical output of the optical amplifier.

Figure 5.7.1-1 Level Measured with Optical Amplifier Measurement

Function

This function has following setting items.

● Method Selects the measurement method.

Spect Div Off: Not using spectrum division method, Pout and Pase are measured by the measured optical output spectrum.

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l (dB

m)

Optical Input

Optical Output Pase

Pout

Pin Signal

Amplified Spontaneous Emission

Page 186: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-48

Spect Div On: Uses the spectrum division method. Pout and Pase are obtained by subtracting the level of the optical input spectrum from the level of the measured output spectrum.

PLZN Nulling: Polarization Nulling Method With the polarization nulling method, Pout and Pase are obtained by assuming that the state of polarization of the optical output from the optical amplifier is as follows:

• The signal is polarized.

• The ASE is unpolarized. If the signal is blocked by the polarizer, then the ASE level can be measured. Pout is the level when the optical signal is passed by the polarizer and Pase is the level when it is blocked by the polarizer.

Pulse Method: Pulse Method The ASE level of the optical amplifier is the level that is held for an instant after the optical signal level is blocked. The pulse modulated optical signal is input to the optical amplifier and Pout and Pase are measured by making use of this property. Pout is the output level when the optical signal is on and Pase is the output level when the optical signal is off.

WDM Measure: Measurement of wavelength multiplexed light The gain and noise figure are measured for the wavelength multiplexed light. Pout and Pase are measured using the pulse method described above for the target wavelength.

● ASE Fitting

At Spect Div Off and Spect Div On, Pase is obtained from the spectrum through an approximation method by a fitting method. There are two types of fitting method as follows:

Gauss Fitting: Fitting Method Using a Gaussian Function Fitting is performed using the second-order approximation L(λ)=aλ2+bλ+c from data in the range of λ1 to λ2 (dBm units) and λ3 to λ4 in Figure 5.7.1-2 (a). The level of the optical signal wavelength λs found from this function is Pase.

Page 187: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier

5-49

5 M

easurement Functions

Mean Fitting: Fitting Method Utilizing a Linear Function The mean of the data for λ2 and λ3 in Figure 5.7.1-2 (b) is found (mW units). The product of this value and optical band filter correction value is Pase.

Figure 5.7.1-2 Finding Pase

The input range and the data set with the optical amplifier measurement are as follows. This data is input in the Parameter dialog box.

Table 5.7.1-1 Setting Range of the Parameters in the Parameter Dialog Box

Item Min. Max. Unit Fitting Span*1 0.10 100.00 nm Masked Span*2 0.10 100.00 nm Pin Loss –10.00 10.00 dB Pout Loss –10.00 10.00 dB NF Cal 0.100 10.000 None O.BPF Lvl Cal 0.00 30.00 dB O.BPF BW 0.00 999.99 nm Pol Loss*3 –10.00 10.00 dB

*1: The Fitting Span is set within the following range so as to fit within the screen’s wavelength range. Signal Wl + Fitting Span/2 = < Stop Signal Wl – Fitting Span/2 > = Start

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l (dB

m)

(a) Gaussian Fitting

l1 l2 ls l3 l4

Pase

Masked Span Fitting Span

Wavelength (nm) Le

vel (

mW

) l1 l2 ls l3 l4

Pase

Masked Span Fitting Span

(b) Mean Fitting

Page 188: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-50

If Fitting Span is set outside the screen wavelength range, the ASE level cannot be calculated.

*2: Masked Span is smaller than Fitting Span. *3: Pol Loss is used by the polarization nulling method. ● Fitting Span

This sets the target data range for ASE Fitting as the width centered around the peak wavelength.

● Masked Span This sets the target data range excluded from ASE Fitting as the width centered around the peak wavelength.

● NF Select

This selects the NF calculation method. S-ASE: The noise figure is calculated from the beat noise between the optical signal and the ASE. Total: The noise figure is calculated from the sum of the following noise values.

• Beat noise between optical signal and ASE optical output

• Beat noise between ASE optical output

• Optical signal shot noise

• ASE optical output shot noise ● NF Cal

This sets the calibration factor used at NF calculation. ● O.BPF Lvl Cal

This sets the pass and filter levels for the optical bandpass filter inserted between the optical amplifier and MS9740B. Set 0 dB when no filter is inserted or when the characteristics of an optical amplifier with built-in filter are evaluated.

Light Source

Optical Amplifier

O. BPF Lvl Cal

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Optical Bandpass Filter

Page 189: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier

5-51

5 M

easurement Functions

● O.BPF BW O.BPF.BW sets the sets the ASE bandwidth when NF Select is Total. When determining the noise figure when a narrow optical bandpass filter is installed, set the filter bandwidth. When determining the noise figure when a filter is not inserted, set the ASE bandwidth. The value set by O.BPF.BW uses items F2 and F4 of the NF (Total) equation described in section 5.7.7. When O.BPF.BW is set to 0 nm, the noise figure does not include beat noise (F2) between ASE nor the ASE shot noise (F4).

● Pin Loss

This sets the level difference that is the level of the optical signal input to MS9740B subtracted from the level of the optical signal actually input to the optical amplifier. This is used when measuring the optical input (Pin).

● Pout Loss

This sets the level difference that is the level of the amplified optical signal input to MS9740B subtracted from the level of the amplified optical signal actually output by the optical amplifier. This is used when measuring the optical output (Pout). When the optical bandpass filter is installed, Pin and Pout are as shown below.

● Pol Loss

This sets the analyzer loss using the polarization nulling method. This is used when measuring the ASE output (Pase). If the optical polarization is changed using the polarization controller, the output level from the analyzer is changed as well. The analyzer loss is the difference between the maximum value of the analyzer output level and the output level from the polarization controller.

Light Source

Signal Optical Amplifier

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Light Source

Signal

(a) Signal Measurement

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

(b) Measurement of Optical Output Optical Bandpass Filter

Pin Pout

Page 190: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-52

● Ext. Trigger Delay This sets the delay time for external sync measurement at pulse or multiple division wavelength measurements. This function button is not displayed in the measurements other than pulse or multiple division wavelength measurements.

● Write to

This selects the signal to be measured. Pin: This measures the optical input. Pout: This measures the optical output. Pase: This measures the amplified spontaneous emission. It can be selected at the polarization nulling method.

● Pin This selects the traces A to J to store the input waveform.

● Pout This selects the traces A to J to store the output waveform.

● Pase This selects the traces A to J to store the ASE waveform.

See 5.7.7 “Calculation Method” for the formulas for each measurement method.

Light Source

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Analyzer

Polarization Controller

Light Source

(a) Measurement of the Output Level of the Polarization Contlroller

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

(b) Measurement of Analyzer Output Level

Polarization Controller

Page 191: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier

5-53

5 M

easurement Functions

5.7.2 Optical Amplifier Measurement Screen Display To display the optical amplifier measurement functions, 1. When the name of the F7 horizontal key is not Application, press F8,

and then press F7. 2. Press f7 More 1/2. 3. Press f1 Opt.AmpTest to display the measurement result display

field. 4. Press f6 Off to finish the optical amplifier measurement.

Figure 5.7.2-1 Sample Opt.Amp-Test

Note: The optical signal power (Pin), power of the signal output from optical amplifier (Pout), and level of the ASE (Pase) are measured at the same wavelength range. When measurement is executed or this function is started, some traces are forcibly deleted if those wavelength ranges are different from the ones displayed by f3 Write to.

Page 192: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-54

5.7.3 Measurement With/Without Spectrum Division Method

Figure 5.7.3-1 Optical Amplifier Measurement System

To perform measurements using the spectrum division method, 1. Press f1 Method. 2. Press f1 Spect Div On. 3. Press f7 More 1/2. 4. Press f1 Pin. Select the traces A to J to store the signal waveform. 5. Press f2 Pout. Select the traces A to J to store the optical output

waveform. 6. Press f7 More 2/2. 7. Input the output light of the optical amplifier to MS9740B as shown

by the connection in Figure 5.7.3-1 (a). 8. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 9. Press f5 Res Cal. 10. Press f1 Execute, and then the message indicating the resolution

calibration in progress is displayed. 11. Press f3 Write to. 12. Press f1 Pin. 13. Press Single or Repeat.

The data for the trace specified at step 4 is stored. 14. Press f3 Write to. 15. Press f2 Pout. 16. Input the output light of the optical amplifier to MS9740B as shown

by the connection in Figure 5.7.3-1 (b). If necessary, insert an optical bandpass filter between the optical amplifier and MS9740B to remove the ASE.

17. Press Single or Repeat. The data for the trace specified at step 5 is stored.

18. Press f2 Parameter.

Light Source

Signal Optical Amplifier

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Light Source

Signal

(a) Signal Measurement

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

(b) Measurement of Optical Output Optical Bandpass Filter

Optical Output

Page 193: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier

5-55

5 M

easurement Functions

19. Set the following items in the dialog box: NF Select: Noise figure calculation method ASE Fitting: Fitting method for the ASE level Fitting Span: Wavelength width targeted for the ASE level calculation Masked Span: Wavelength width excluded from the ASE level

calculation Pin Loss: Calibration factor for the optical level input Pout Loss: Calibration factor for the optical level output NF Cal: Calibration factor for the noise figure O.BPF Lvl Cal: Attenuation of the optical bandpass filter O.BPF BW: Optical bandpass filter bandwidth For the input range, refer to Table 5.7.1-1.

20. Press f7 Set to update the value in the measurement result display field.

To perform measurements without using the spectrum division method 1. Press f1 Method. 2. Press f2 Spect Div Off. 3. Perform operations 3 to 20 in the “To perform measurements using

the spectrum division method” procedures.

Page 194: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-56

5.7.4 Measurement Using Polarization Nulling Method

Figure 5.7.4-1 Measurement System for Polarization Nulling Method

To perform measurements using the polarization nulling method 1. Press f1 Method. 2. Press f3 PLZN Nulling. 3. Press f7 More 1/2. 4. Press f1 Pin. Select the traces A to J to store the signal waveform. 5. Press f2 Pout. Select the traces A to J to store the optical output

waveform. 6. Press f3 Pase. Select the traces A to J to store the ASE waveform. 7. Press f7 More 2/2. 8. Input the output light of the optical amplifier to MS9740B as shown

by the connection in Figure 5.7.4-1 (a). 9. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 10. Press f5 Res Cal. 11. Press f1 Execute. The message indicating the resolution calibration

in progress is displayed. 12. Press f3 Write to. 13. Press f1 Pin. 14. Press Single or Repeat.

The data for the trace specified at step 4 is stored. 15. Press f3 Write to. 16. Press f2 Pout.

Light Source

Optical Amplifier

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Analyzer

Polarization Controller

Light Source

Signal

(a) Signal Measurement

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

(b) Measurement of ASE and Optical Output

Polarization Controller

Page 195: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier

5-57

5 M

easurement Functions

17. Input the output light of the optical amplifier to MS9740B as shown by the connection in Figure 5.7.4-1 (b).

18. Adjust the polarization controller to maximize the optical output level.

19. Press Single or Repeat. The data for the trace specified at step 5 is stored.

20. Press f3 Write to. 21. Press f3 Pase. 22. Adjust the polarization controller to minimize the optical output

level. 23. Press Single or Repeat.

The data for the trace specified at step 6 is stored. 24. Press f2 Parameter. 25. Set the following items in the dialog box:

NF Select: Noise figure calculation method ASE Fitting: Fitting method for the ASE level Fitting Span: Wavelength width targeted for the ASE level

calculation Masked Span: Wavelength width excluded from the ASE level

calculation Pin Loss: Calibration factor for the signal level Pout Loss: Calibration factor for the optical level output NF Cal: Calibration factor for the noise figure O.BPF Lvl Cal: Attenuation from the optical bandpass filter O.BPF BW: Optical bandpass filter bandwidth Pol Loss: Attenuation from the analyzer

For the input range, refer to Table 5.7.1-1. 26. Press f7 Set to update the value in the measurement result display

field.

Page 196: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-58

5.7.5 Measurement Using Pulse Method

Figure 5.7.5-1 Pulse Method Measurement System

The light source used by pulse method is digitally modulated at a higher frequency (≤ 500 kHz) than the optical amplifier power control frequency. Normally, the modulation signal duty ratio is 50%. Adjust the output level of the signal generator to maximize the extinction ratio of the light source.

Optical Amplifier

Optical Bandpass Filter

Light Source

Intensity Modulated Light

(a) Signal Measurement

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal Generator

Modulation Signal

Light Source

(b) Measurement of ASE and Optical Output

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal Generator

Optical Output

Ext Trigger

Ext Trigger

Optical Bandpass Filter

Modulation Signal

Intensity Modulated Light

Page 197: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier

5-59

5 M

easurement Functions

Set the difference between the time when the signal input to the Ext Trigger connector changes and the time when sampling the optical signal input to MS9740B as the Ext Trigger Delay. Measure the signal level Pout after elapse of the Ext Trigger Delay starting from the Ext Trigger rise, and measure the ASE level Pase after elapse of the Ext Trigger Delay starting from the Ext Trigger fall.

Figure 5.7.5-2 Definition of Ext Trigger Delay

To perform measurements using the pulse method 1. Press f1 Method. 2. Press f4 Pulse Method. 3. Press f7 More 1/2. 4. Press f1 Pin. Select the traces A to J to store the signal waveform. 5. Press f2 Pout. Select the traces A to J to store the optical output

waveform. 6. Press f3 Pase. Select the traces A to J to store the ASE waveform. 7. Press f7 More 2/2. 8. Input the output light of the optical amplifier to MS9740B as shown

by the connection in Figure 5.7.5-1 (a). Input the modulation signal to the Ext Trigger connector on the rear panel.

9. Set VBW to a larger value than the modulation frequency. 10. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 11. Press f5 Res Cal. 12. Press f1 Execute. The message indicating the resolution calibration

in progress is displayed. 13. Press f4 Ext. Trigger Delay. 14. Adjust the delay time to maximize the optical signal level and press

f8 Back.

External Trigger Input

Ext Trigger Delay

Optical Input to the Optical Spectrum Analyzer

Time Opt

ical

leve

l Time Vo

ltage

Signal Amplified Spontaneous Emission

Page 198: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-60

15. Press f3 Write to. 16. Press f1 Pin. 17. Press Single or Repeat.

The data for the trace specified at step 4 is stored. 18. Press f3 Write to. 19. Press f2 Pout. 20. Input the output light of the optical amplifier to MS9740B as shown

by the connection in Figure 5.7.5-1 (b). If necessary, insert an optical bandpass filter between the optical amplifier and MS9740B to remove the ASE.

21. Press f4 Ext. Trigger Delay. 22. Adjust the delay time to maximize the optical signal level. 23. Press Single or Repeat.

The optical amplifier optical signal and the ASE optical output data are each stored at the trace specified at steps 5 and 6.

24. Press f2 Parameter. 25. Set the following items in the dialog box:

NF Select: Noise figure calculation method Pin Loss: Calibration factor for the signal level Pout Loss: Calibration factor for the optical level output NF Cal: Calibration factor for the noise figure O.BPF Lvl Cal: Attenuation from the optical bandpass filter O.BPF BW: Optical bandpass filter bandwidth

For the input range, refer to Table 5.7.1-1. 26. Press f7 Set to update the value in the measurement result display

field.

Page 199: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier

5-61

5 M

easurement Functions

5.7.6 Measuring Performance with Respect to Wavelength Multiplexed Light

Figure 5.7.6-1 Measurement System When Optical Input is Wavelength Multiplexed

The pulse method is used to measure the performance of optical amplifiers for wavelength division multiplexing optical signals. In this system, the light source is pulse modulated and the gain and noise figure of the wavelength are measured. The MS9740B identifies the pulse-modulated optical signal and detects the wavelength for measuring the optical amplifier performance. To measure the performance of the optical amplifier when the optical input is wavelength multiplexed 1. Press f1 Method. 2. Press f5 WDM Measure. 3. Press f7 More 1/2.

(a) Signal Measurement

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Signal Generator

(b) Measurement of ASE and Optical Output

Optical Output

LS l2

LS ln

LS l1

: Ext Trigger

Signal Generator

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Ext Trigger

Optical Amplifier

Optical Coupler

Optical Bandpass Filter

Intensity Modulated Light

Intensity Modulated Light

Modulation Signal

Modulation Signal

Optical Coupler

Optical Bandpass Filter

LS: Light Source

LS l2

LS ln

LS l1

:

Page 200: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-62

4. Press f1 Pin. Select the traces A to J to store the signal waveform. 5. Press f2 Pout. Select the traces A to J to store the optical output

waveform. 6. Press f3 Pase. Select the traces A to J to store the ASE waveform. 7. Press f7 More 2/2. 8. Input the output light of the optical amplifier to MS9740B as shown

by the connection in Figure 5.7.6-1 (a). Input the modulation signal to the Ext Trigger connector on the rear panel.

9. Set VBW to a larger value than the modulation frequency. 10. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 11. To calibrate the resolution, input single spectrum light into the

optical spectrum analyzer. To achieve this, set the optical output for just one light source to on and the output of the other light sources to off.

12. Press f5 Res Cal. 13. Press f1 Execute. The message indicating the resolution calibration

in progress is displayed. 14. Set the optical output of the light source set to off at step 11 to on. 15. Press f4 Ext Trigger Delay. 16. Adjust the delay time to maximize the optical signal level and press

f8 Back. 17. Press f3 Write to. 18. Press f1 Pin. 19. Press Single or Repeat.

The data for the trace specified at step 4 is stored. 20. Press f3 Write to. 21. Press f2 Pout. 22. Connect as shown by the connection in Figure 5.7.6-1 (b) and input

the output light of the optical amplifier to MS9740B. If necessary, insert an optical bandpass filter between the optical amplifier and MS9740B to remove the ASE.

23. Press f4 Ext Trigger Delay. 24. Adjust the delay time to maximize the optical signal level and press

f8 Back. 25. Press Single or Repeat.

The optical amplifier optical signal and the ASE optical output data are each stored at the trace specified at steps 5 and 6.

26. Press f2 Parameter.

Page 201: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier

5-63

5 M

easurement Functions

27. Set the following items in the dialog box: NF Select: Noise figure calculation method Pin Loss: Calibration factor for the signal level Pout Loss: Calibration factor for the optical level output NF Cal: Calibration factor for the noise figure O.BPF Lvl Cal: Ratio of pass level and filter level of optical

bandpass filter inserted between the optical amplifier and MS9740B

O.BPF BW: Optical bandpass filter bandwidth For the input range, refer to Table 5.7.1-1. 28. Press f7 Set to update the value in the measurement result display

field.

Page 202: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-64

5.7.7 Calculation Method This section explains the method for calculating the optical amplifier gain and noise figure. The noise figure calculation method differs according to the NF Select setting. Gain (dB) Calculation Method Gain is a comparison of the optical signal level and the amplified signal level. The optical amplifier output optical signal level includes the level of the ASE generated in the optical amplifier. Consequently, the amplified optical signal level is level of the optical output minus the level of the ASE.

)log(10 GGain =

)()(

s

s

PinPasePout

Gl

l −=

G: Gain λs: Optical signal wavelength (nm) Pin(λs): Level of optical input to optical amplifier at optical signal

wavelength (W) Pout(λs): Level of optical output to optical amplifier at optical signal

wavelength (W) Pase: Level of ASE output level at optical signal wavelength (W)

NF (dB) Calculation Method When NF Select is S-ASE The noise figure is calculated from the beat noise between the optical signal and the ASE optical output.

)log(10vsGh

PasekNF∆⋅⋅⋅

⋅=ν

910)2

12

1( ⋅⋅+

−−

=∆ cResRes

srealsvrealsv ll

ν

910⋅=sv

cl

ν

k: Correction value set by NF Cal λsv: Wavelength of optical signal in vacuum (nm) Δνs: Frequency bandwidth of actual resolution at Pase

measurement (Hz) h: Planck’s Constant 6.626 × 10-34 (J•s) ν: Frequency of optical signal (Hz)

Page 203: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.7 Measuring Optical Amplifier

5-65

5 M

easurement Functions

Resreal: Resolution calibrated by Res Cal (nm) c: Light Velocity 2.9979 × 108 (m/s)

When NF Select is Total The noise figure is calculated from the sum of noises due to four noise sources.

))+++(·log(10= 4321 FFFFkNF

vsGhPaseF

∆⋅⋅⋅=

ν1

vaPinGhPasetF

s ∆⋅⋅⋅⋅=

)(2 2

2

2 lν

GF 1

3 =

)(24sPinG

PasetFl⋅

=

F1: Beat noise between optical signal and ASE optical output F2: Beat noise between ASE optical output F3: Optical signal shot noise F4: ASE optical output shot noise Paset: ASE optical output total power (W)

saPasePaset

νν

∆∆

⋅=

910)2/

12

1( ⋅⋅+

−−

=∆ cBPFBWBPFBW

asvsv ll

ν

BPFBW: Optical bandpass filter bandwidth (nm)

Page 204: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-66

Spectrum Division Calculation Method The level of the ASE output from the optical amplifier is the sum of the following levels:

● Noise Level generated in optical amplifier ● Noise level for amplified optical signal The spectrum division method finds the noise level generated in the optical amplifier (spectrum correction value) by subtracting the amplified optical signal level from the optical amplifier output level. The ASE optical output level Pase is measured from the spectrum correction value, which is calculated using the spectral division method. The formula for the spectrum correction value Pcorr (λ) is as follows. The spectrum correction value is calculated after first calculating the provisional gain G1.

BPFLcalPinlossPinGPoutlossPoutPcorr ⋅⋅

−⋅=)()()( 1 lll

PinlossPinPoutlossPout

Gs

s

⋅⋅

=)()(

1 ll

Pcorr(λ)=0 when Pcorr(λ)<0 Pin(λ): Level at optical input wavelength λ (W) Pout(λ): Level at optical output wavelength λ (W) Pinloss: Linear value for Pin Loss entry Poutloss: Linear value for Pout Loss entry G1: Gain BPFLcal: Linear value set at O.BPF Lvl Cal

Calculation using polarization nulling method The polarization nulling method removes the optical signal from the optical output using a detector. Consequently, it is not necessary to subtract the optical signal level from the ASE optical output level. However, correction is required because the ASE optical output level is halved by the detector. In the polarization nulling method, Pin, Pout, and Pase are obtained from the following equation using the gain and noise figure calculation.

Pase = 2•Psp-ase•Polloss Pin(λ) = Psp-in(λ)•Pinloss Pout(λ) = Pap-out(λ)•Poutloss Psp-ase: ASE level (W) calculated by fitting curve Polloss: Linear value of value input at Pol Loss Psp-in(λ): Level at optical input wavelength λ (W) Pap-out(λ):Level at optical output wavelength λ (W)

Page 205: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

5-67

5 M

easurement Functions

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

With the optical amplifier (WDM), the following items are measured simultaneously for the multiple optical signals.

Table 5.8-1 Opt. Amp Multi Measurement Items

Screen Display Description Peak Count Signal count Gain Slope Slope when a straight line approximation is

performed based on the gain obtained for each optical signal.

Gain Vari Ratio between the maximum gain and the minimum gain

No Number of signal (sequential number added from short wavelength)

Wl (nm) Wavelength of signal Pin (dBm) Optical signal level input Pout (dBm) Optical signal level output ASE (dBm) ASE level for signal Res (nm) Actual resolution Gain (dB) Gain NF (dB) Noise figure

The noise figure and gain are calculated from the power of the optical input to the optical amplifier (Pin), the power of the optical signal output from the optical amplifier (Pout), and the ASE level. Refer to 5.8.4 “Calculation Method” for details. Pin, Pout, and ASE are measured from the optical input to the optical amplifier and the spectrum of the optical output of the optical amplifier.

Page 206: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-68

This function has following setting items. ● ISS Method

This selects measurement method. IEC: This measurement method conforms to IEC standards. Advanced: This measurement method has less error due to optical input ASE noise than IEC or Off. Off: This measurement method is equivalent to “5.7.1 Optical Amplifier Measurement Method”, Spect Div Off.

● Channel Parameter

This sets the optical signal level range and the wavelength detection method. For details, see 5.8.2 “How to Set the Signal Measurement Method”.

● Opt Amp Test Parameter

This sets the Opt Amp Multi measurement’s ASE display, detection method, NF calculation method, and the actual resolution calculation method. For details, see 5.8.3 “How to Set the Estimated Noise Measurement Method”.

● Write to This selects the signal to be measured. Pin: This measures the optical input. Pout: This measures the optical output.

● Display Mode This selects the measurement results display method. For details, see 5.8.1 “Optical Amplifier (WDM) Screen Display”.

● Pin

This selects the traces A to J to store the input waveform. ● Pout

This selects the traces A to J to store the output waveform.

Page 207: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

5-69

5 M

easurement Functions

5.8.1 Optical Amplifier (WDM) Screen Display To display the optical amplifier (WDM) measurement functions, 1. When the name of the F7 horizontal key is not Application, press F8,

and then press F7. 2. Press f7 More 1/2. 3. Press f2 Opt.Amp (Multi Channel) Test to display the measurement

result display field. 4. Press f6 Off to finish the optical amplifier (WDM) measurement. The optical amplifier (WDM) measurement has two types of measurement screens.

The displayed measurement results for each screen display are the same.

Trace & Table: Up to four measurement results for each optical signal are displayed in one screen.

Figure 5.8.1-1 Trace & Table Display Example

Page 208: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-70

Table: Up to 16 measurement results for each optical signal are displayed in one screen.

Figure 5.8.1-2 Table Display Example

Page 209: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

5-71

5 M

easurement Functions

5.8.2 How to Set the Signal Measurement Method In the Channel Parameter dialog box, set the optical signal level range and the wavelength detection method.

Figure 5.8.2-1 Channel Parameter Dialog Box

Table 5.8.2-1 Setting Range of the Parameters in the Channel Parameter

Dialog Box

Item Min. Max. Unit S.Level 0.1 50.0 dB Search Threshold 0.01 10.00 dB Cut Level 0.1 50.0 dB

Page 210: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-72

● S.Level Level difference (dB) from the maximum level, which sets the level range for detecting the signal. Peaks with values above the lowest value in the S. Level portion below the maximum peak are detected as the signal. In the following figure, the peaks detected are points b, c, d, and e.

Figure 5.8.2-2 Peaks Targeted for Analysis

Note: Peak level is the sum of signal level and noise level.

● Search Threshold

This sets the threshold value for detecting the peak for the next highest and subsequent levels after the maximum level peak.

● Wavelength Detection Type: Signal wavelength detection method Peak: Wavelength peaks Threshold: Center wavelength analyzed Threshold Threshold Cut Level: Detects peak as signal and level range from

maximum. This parameter is enabled when Threshold is selected. Threshold Cut Level is set in the range of 0.1 to 50.0.

Peak Level Slice Level

a

b c d

e

Page 211: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

5-73

5 M

easurement Functions

Note: If no wavelength is detected within the level range specified by Threshold Cut Level, the screen center wavelength becomes the detected wavelength.

Figure 5.8.2-3 Signal Wavelength Measurement Method

When Peak is set Cut Level

Signal Wl: Peak Wavelength

When Threshold is set

Signal Wl: Center Wavelength of Threshold Level

Threshold Level

Page 212: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-74

5.8.3 How to Set the Estimated Noise Measurement Method In the Opt Amp Test Parameter dialog box, set the Opt Amp Multi measurement’s fitting curve display, detection method, NF calculation method, and the actual resolution calculation method.

Figure 5.8.3-1 Opt Amp Test Parameter Dialog Box

Page 213: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

5-75

5 M

easurement Functions

Table 5.8.3-1 Setting Range of the Parameters in the Opt Amp Test Parameter Dialog Box

Item Min. Max. Unit Fitting Span (Manual)*1 0.10 100.00 nm Masked Span*1 0.10 100.00 nm Point (Manual)*2 0.10 100.00 nm Pin Loss (Offset) –10.00 10.00 dB Pout Loss (Offset) –10.00 10.00 dB O.BPF Lvl Cal 0.00 30.00 dB O.BPF BW 0.00 999.99 nm NF Cal 0.100 10.000 None

*1: The Fitting Span is set with Signal Wl as a center. The noise location of Fitting Span and Masked Span is Signal Wl ± Fitting Span/2. Note that the calculation method is different from that of Point.

*2: Point is the location using Signal Wl as a reference. The noise location is Signal Wl ± Point. Note that the calculation method is different from that of Fitting Span and Masked Span.

● Detection Type Area: The noise level is estimated from the value of fitting curve at

signal wavelength. The fitting curve is calculated from the noise wavelength in the Area

Point: The noise level is estimated by linear interpolation from the position set for the Point.

Figure 5.8.3-2 Detection Method for Estimated Noise Level

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l

(a) Area

l1 l2 ls l3 l4

Estimate noise level

Masked Span Fitting Span

Wavelength (nm)

Leve

l

l1 ls l2

Estimate noise level

Point

(b) Point

Page 214: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-76

● Fitting Display Off: The fitting curve is not displayed On: The fitting curve is displayed

● Area: Set the fitting curve calculation range when Detection Type is Area Fitting Curve:

Selects the type of fitting curve. Linear: Linear equation for noise linear data

f (λ) = aλ + b Gauss: Binomial equation for noise log data

f (λ) = aλ2 + bλ + c 3rd POLY: Third-order polynomial equation for noise linear data

F (λ) = aλ3 + bλ2 + cλ + d 4th POLY: Fourth-order polynomial equation for noise linear data

f (λ) = aλ4 + bλ3 + cλ2 + dλ + e 5th POLY: Fifth-order polynomial equation for noise linear data

f (λ) = aλ5 + bλ4 + cλ3 + dλ2 + eλ + f Fitting Span Mode:

Select the range for calculating the fitting curve. Auto (Center):

Use the halfway point to the neighboring signal as the wavelength range calculated. (See Figure 5.8.3-3)

Manual: Use a manually set value as the wavelength range calculated.

Masked Span: Set the wavelength range excluded from fitting curve calculation.

Figure 5.8.3-3 Auto (Center) Fitting Range

Wl1 Wl2 Wl3

Leve

l

Wavelength (nm)

The halfway point to the neighboring signal

The halfway point to the neighboring signal

Fitting Range Fitting Range

Fitting Range

Same Value Same Value

Same Value

Page 215: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

5-77

5 M

easurement Functions

● Point: Select the noise level detection position when Detection Type is Point Auto (Center):

The halfway point to the neighboring signal is used as the noise level detection position. (See Figure 5.8.3-3) If there is only one signal, then the noise level dependent on Resolution during waveform measurement is used as the detection position. (See Table 5.8.3-2)

Auto (Res): A value dependent on Resolution during waveform measurement is used as the noise level detection position. (See Table 5.8.3-2)

Manual: Use a manually set value as the noise level detection position.

Table 5.8.3-2 Values Dependent on Resolution

Set Resolution (nm) Noise Point (nm)* 0.03 0.50 0.05 0.53 0.07 0.60 0.1 0.65 0.2 0.8 0.5 1.3 1.0 2.2

*: Distance (not span) from the signal wavelength ● NF Select

This selects the NF calculation method. S-ASE: The noise figure is calculated from the beat noise between

the optical signal and the ASE. Total: The noise figure is calculated from the sum of the

following noise values. ● Beat noise between optical signal and ASE

optical output ● Beat noise between ASE optical output ● Optical signal shot noise ● ASE optical output shot noise

● Actual Resolution

This selects the Actual Resolution used in the NF calculation. Measured: This uses a value calculated from a formula. (See 5.8.4 “Calculation Method”) Initial: This uses a value set at time of shipment.

Page 216: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-78

● Pin Loss (Offset) This sets the level difference that is the level of the optical signal input to MS9740B subtracted from the level of the optical signal actually input to the optical amplifier. This is used when measuring the optical input (Pin).

● Pout Loss (Offset) This sets the level difference that is the level of the amplified optical signal input to MS9740B subtracted from the level of the amplified optical signal actually output by the optical amplifier. This is used when measuring the optical output (Pout).

● O.BPF Lvl Cal

This sets the pass and filter levels for the optical bandpass filter inserted between the optical amplifier and MS9740B. Set 0 dB when no filter is inserted or when the characteristics of an optical amplifier with built-in filter are evaluated.

● O.BPF BW O.BPF.BW sets the sets the ASE bandwidth when NF Select is Total. When determining the noise figure when a narrow optical bandpass filter is installed, set the filter bandwidth. When determining the noise figure when a filter is not inserted, set the ASE bandwidth. The value set by O.BPF.BW uses items F2 and F4 of the NF (Total) equation described in section 5.8.4. When O.BPF.BW is set to 0 nm, the noise figure does not include beat noise (F2) between ASE nor the ASE shot noise (F4).

● NF Cal This sets the calibration factor used at NF calculation.

Light Source

Optical Amplifier

O. BPF Lvl Cal

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Optical Bandpass Filter

Page 217: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

5-79

5 M

easurement Functions

5.8.4 Calculation Method This section explains the method for calculating the optical amplifier gain and noise figure. The noise figure calculation method differs according to the NF Select setting. ISS Method: IEC calculation method This performs the following calculation when the IN waveform (Pin(λ)) and OUT waveform (Pout(λ)) are gathered, to calculate the gain and noise figure.

(1) For the IN waveform (a) The peak is detected in accordance with the peak detection

setting (S.Level, Search Threshold), and the peak wavelengths (Wi..n) and peak levels (Pini..n) are obtained.

(b) Fitting is applied in accordance with the fitting conditions (Fitting Span, Masked Span, Fitting Curve or Point) for the IN waveform, and the noise level’s estimated values (Nini..n) are obtained.

(2) For the OUT waveform (a) The peak levels (Pouti..n) are obtained at the peak wavelengths

(Wi..n). (b) Fitting is applied in accordance with the fitting conditions

(Fitting Span, Masked Span, Fitting Curve or Point) for the OUT waveform, and the noise level’s estimated values (Nouti..n) are obtained.

Gain (Gi) and ASE (Pasei) are obtained as follows, and the noise figure is calculated with the NF formula.

i

iii Pin

NoutPoutG

−=

iNin⋅−=  iii GNoutPase ISS Method: Advanced Calculation Method The steps up to obtaining the peak levels (Pini, Pouti) and estimated values for noise levels (Nini, Nouti) for the IN and OUT waveforms are the same as with IEC. However the formulas for obtaining gain (Gi) and ASE (Pasei) are as follows, and the noise figure is calculated with the NF formula.

ii

iii NinPin

NoutPoutG

−−

=

ii

iiiii NinPin

NinoutPPase

−⋅−⋅

=PoutPin

Page 218: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-80

ISS Method: Off Calculation Method This performs the following calculation when the IN waveform (Pin(λ)) and OUT waveform (Pout(λ)) are gathered, to calculate the gain and noise figure.

(1) For the IN waveform The peak is detected in accordance with the peak detection setting (S.Level, Search Threshold), and the peak wavelengths (Wi..n) and peak levels (Pini..n) are obtained.

(2) For the OUT waveform (a) The peak levels (Pouti..n) are obtained at the peak wavelengths

(Wi..n) obtained in (1). (b) Fitting is applied in accordance with the fitting conditions

(Fitting Span, Masked Span, Fitting Curve or Point) for the OUT waveform, and the ASE values (Pasei..n) are obtained.

Gain (Gi) and ASE (Pasei) are obtained as follows, and the noise figure is calculated with the NF formula.

i

iii Pin

NoutPoutG

−=

Pasei = ASE obtained in (2) Actual Resolution (Actual Resolution (nm)) calculation method When the Actual Resolution is Measured

1. Peak levels (Ppi (i=1..N)) are obtained for each signal. 2. Half the range with respect to the neighboring channel is integrated

centered on the peak wavelength for each signal. If there is only one signal, the Auto(Res) value (see Table 5.8.3-2) is used. These integration values are used as Spi (i=1..N). The integration value is obtained with the following formula.

∑−= ii P

SmplSpanSp

1

Span: Span (nm) Smpl: Sampling point Pi: ith data level (W) in the integration range

Page 219: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

5-81

5 M

easurement Functions

The actual resolution for each signal is obtained as follows based on the values obtained in 1. and 2.

i

i

PpSp

ResolutionActual =

Figure 5.8.4-1 Integration Range for Signals in Multiple Channels

Figure 5.8.4-2 Integration Range for Only One Signal

When the Actual Resolution is Initial This uses a value set at time of shipment. Noise figure NF (dB) Calculation Method When NF Select is S-ASE The noise figure is calculated from the beat noise between the optical signal and the ASE optical output.

)log(10vsGh

PasekNF∆⋅⋅⋅

⋅=ν

910)2Re

12Re

1( ⋅⋅+

−−

=∆ css

srealsvrealsv ll

ν

910⋅=sv

cl

ν

Wl1

Leve

l

Wavelength (nm)

Auto (Res)

Auto (Res)

Wl1 Wl2 Wl3

Leve

l

Wavelength (nm)

Same value

Same value Same

value

Page 220: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-82

k: Correction value set by NF Cal λsv: Wavelength of optical signal in vacuum (nm) Δνs: Frequency bandwidth of actual resolution at Pase

measurement (Hz) h: Planck’s Constant 6.626 × 10–34 (J-s) ν: Frequency of optical signal (Hz) Resreal: Actual resolution (nm) c: Light velocity 2.9979 × 108 (m/s)

When NF Select is Total The noise figure is calculated from the sum of noises due to four noise sources.

))+++(·log(10= 4321 FFFFkNF

vsGhPaseF

∆⋅⋅⋅=

ν1

vaPinGhPasetF

s ∆⋅⋅⋅⋅=

)(2 2

2

2 lν

GF 1

3 =

)(24sPinG

PasetFl⋅

=

F1: Beat noise between optical signal and ASE optical output F2: Beat noise between ASE optical output F3: Optical signal shot noise F4: ASE optical output shot noise Paset: ASE optical output total power (W)

saPasePaset

νν

∆∆

⋅=

910)2/

12

1( ⋅⋅+

−−

=∆ cBPFBWBPFBW

asvsv ll

ν

BPFBW: Optical bandpass filter bandwidth (nm)

Page 221: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

5-83

5 M

easurement Functions

5.8.5 Procedure

Figure 5.8.5-1 Measurement System When the Optical Input is Wavelength Multiplexed

To measure the Optical Amplifier (WDM) 1. Press f1 ISS Method. 2. Press f1 to f3 to select an ISS Method. 3. Press f7 More 1/2. 4. Press f1 Pin. Select the traces A to J to store the signal waveform. 5. Press f2 Pout. Select the traces A to J to store the optical output

waveform. 6. Press f7 More 2/2. 7. Input the output light of the optical amplifier to MS9740B as shown

by the connection in Figure 5.8.5-1 (a). 8. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 9. Press f4 Write to. 10. Press f1 Pin. 11. Press Single or Repeat.

The data for the trace specified at step 4 is stored. 12. Press f4 Write to. 13. Press f2 Pout.

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

LS l2

LS ln

LS l1

:

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

LS l2

LS ln

LS l1

:

Optical amplifier

Optical coupler

Optical coupler

(a) Signal Measurement

(b) Measurement of ASE and Optical Output

LS: Light Source

Page 222: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-84

14. Input the output light of the optical amplifier to MS9740B as shown by the connection in Figure 5.8.5-1 (b).

15. Press Single or Repeat. The data for the trace specified at step 5 is stored.

16. Press f2 Channel Parameter. 17. Set the following items in the dialog box:

S.Level: Set the level range for detecting the signal. Search Threshold: Set the threshold value for detecting the peak for

the next highest and subsequent levels after the maximum level’s peak.

Wavelength-Detection Type: Set the detection method for the signal wavelength.

Wavelength-Threshold Cut Level: Set the level range from the maximum peak for detecting peaks in a signal. For the setting range, refer to Table 5.8.2-1.

18. Press f7 Set. 19. Press f3 Opt Amp Test Parameter. 20. Set the following items in the dialog box:

Detection Type: Sets Area or Point. Area: When Area is set at Detection Type, sets the

fitting curve and measurement area. Point: When Point is set at Detection Type, sets the

measurement position. Fitting Curve Display:

This sets whether to display or not display the fitting curve.

NF Select: This sets the NF calculation method. Actual Resolution: This sets the NF calculation method. Pin Loss(Offset): This sets the calibration factor for signal level. Pout Loss(Offset): This sets the calibration factor for the optical

signal output level. O.BPF Lvl Cal: This sets Attenuation from the optical bandpass

filter. O.BPF BW: This sets optical bandpass filter bandwidth. NF Cal: This sets the NF calibration factor.

For the input range, refer to Table 5.8.3-1.

Page 223: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.8 Measuring Optical Amplifier (Wavelength Division Multiplex)

5-85

5 M

easurement Functions

21. Press f7 Set to update the value in the measurement result display field.

22. If all of the wavelength data cannot be displayed onscreen, press f7 More 1/2, and f4 Next Page or f5 Last Page.

23. Press f6 Off to finish the optical amplifier (WDM) measurement.

Page 224: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-86

5.9 Measuring WDM Filter The WDM filter is an optical filter that passes light having a wavelength defined in ITU-T. The WDM filter function is used to measure the following items:

● CH Wl (nm): Reference wavelength of signal*1 ● Spacing (nm): Wavelength difference between signals ● PK Wl (nm): Peak wavelength of signal ● CH Lvl (dB): Filter loss at the reference wavelength of each

signal*2 ● CH Lvl (dBm): Signal level at the reference wavelength*3 ● x dB BW (nm): Signal bandwidth at a level difference of x dB*4 ● PK Lvl (dB): Minimum filter loss in signal*2 ● PK Lvl (dBm): Peak signal level*3 ● Ripple (dB): Difference between maximum and minimum

levels in the specified wavelength range ● n dB Wl (nm): Signal wavelength using n dB Threshold method ● Total Power (dBm): Integrated power of displayed waveform*3 ● Peak Count: Signal count

*1: The wavelength detected by the method selected at Channel – Detection Type in Figure 5.9.3-1 is displayed.

*2: This item is measured only when the active trace type is “Calculate”.

*3: This item is measured only when the active trace type is other than “Calculate”.

*4: The bandwidth detected by the method selected at Analysis Type in Figure 5.9.3-1 is displayed.

Page 225: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.9 Measuring WDM Filter

5-87

5 M

easurement Functions

5.9.1 WDM Filter Transmission Characteristics Measurement Method A light source with a continuous spectrum, (for example, SLD (Super luminescent diode)), is required to measure the transmission characteristics of the WDM filter. The spectra of both of the light source and the light passed through the WDM filter are measured. The transmission characteristics of the WDM filter are obtained from the difference between measured waveforms.

Figure 5.9.1-1 Example Spectra of Light Source and Light Passed Through Filter—1

Figure 5.9.1-2 Example Spectra of Light Source and Light Passed Through

Filter—2

Page 226: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-88

5.9.2 WDM Filter Screen Display To display the WDM filter measurement functions, 1. When the name of the F7 horizontal key is not Application, press F8,

and then press F7. 2. Press f7 More 1/2. 3. Press f3 WDM Filter Test to display the WDM Filter Measurement

screen. 4. Press f1 MEAS Item to show/hide a graph. 5. Press f3 CH No. Next Page or f4 CH No. Last Page to switch the filter

numbers to be displayed. 6. Press f5 Display Mode to show/hide a waveform. 7. Press f7 Off to finish the WDM filter measurement. The WDM filter measurement has two types of measurement screens. The displayed measurement results are the same between the two types.

Trace & Table: Both waveform and measurement results are displayed in one screen.

Figure 5.9.2-1 Trace & Table Display Example

Page 227: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.9 Measuring WDM Filter

5-89

5 M

easurement Functions

Table: Up to 16 measurement results for each waveform are displayed in one screen.

Figure 5.9.2-2 Table Display Example

Page 228: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-90

5.9.3 How to Set the WDM Filter Measurement Method Press f6 Test Parameter to display the Test Parameter dialog box. In the Test Parameter dialog box, set the detection method for WDM filter wavelength, and the detection level.

Figure 5.9.3-1 Test Parameter Dialog Box

Table 5.9.3-1 Setting Range of the Parameters in the Test Parameter

Dialog Box

Item Min. Max. Unit S.Level 0.1 50.0 dB Search Threshold 0.01 10.00 dB Channel

Cut Level 0.1 50.0 dB Threshold Wavelength

Cut Level A Cut Level B

0.1 0.1

50.0 50.0

dB dB

BW/Pass Band Cut Level A Cut Level B Pass-Band Span

0.1 0.1

0.01

50.0 50.0

999.99

dB dB nm

Level Signal Span 0.01 50.00 nm

Ripple Span 0.01 999.99 nm

Page 229: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.9 Measuring WDM Filter

5-91

5 M

easurement Functions

● S.Level Set the range (dB) from the peak for detecting the signal passed through the WDM filter. Peaks having a level equal to or higher than the level lower than the maximum peak by the amount of the S.Level value are detected as the WDM filter signal. In the following example, peaks b, c, d and e are detected.

Figure 5.9.3-2 Signal Subject to Analysis

● Search Threshold

Set the threshold value for detecting the peak for the next highest and subsequent levels after the maximum level’s peak.

● Channel Detection Type: Detection method for signal wavelength (CH Wl)

Peak: Wavelength peaks Threshold: Mean value of the wavelength that is lower than

the peak level by the amount of Cut Level RMS: This is calculated by using the data with a lower

level than the peak by the amount of Cut Level, by using the following equation:

( ){ }

( )( ) ( ) ( )

( ) ( ) ( )nPPPnPPP

iP

iPc n

n

i

n

ii

+・・・+

+・・・+==λ

2121 21

1

1 llll

=

=

×

lc: Signal wavelength P(i): ith data level l (i): ith wavelength

When Threshold or RMS is selected, set the Cut Level in the range of 0.1 to 50.0.

Note:

If no wavelength is detected within the level range specified by Cut Level, the screen center wavelength becomes the detected wavelength.

Peak Level Slice Level

a

b c d

e

Page 230: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-92

Figure 5.9.3-3 Measurement Method for Signal Wavelength

● Threshold Wavelength Set two threshold levels (Cut Level A and Cut Level B) for obtaining the signal wavelength (n dB Wl) by using the n dB Threshold method.

• BW/Pass Band Analysis Type: Analysis method for the bandwidth (x dB BW)

centered around the signal wavelength BW: Spectrum width at the level that is lower than

the peak level by the amount of the value specified by Cut Level A and Cut Level B

Pass Band: Spectrum width at the level that is lower than the dip point in the Pass-Band Span range centered around the signal wavelength, by the amount of the value specified by Cut Level A and Cut Level B

Cut Level

CH Wl: Peak Wavelength

When Threshold is selected

CH Wl: Center Wavelength at the

Threshold Level

Threshold Level

When RMS is selected

CH Wl: Calculated Wavelength

Cut Level Calculation Range

When Peak is selected

Page 231: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.9 Measuring WDM Filter

5-93

5 M

easurement Functions

Figure 5.9.3-4 Measurement Method for Bandwidth

● Level Set the level measurement method for signal spectrum. For details, refer to “Level” in 5.5.2, “How to Set the Signal Measurement Method”.

● Ripple

The wavelength range for ripple measurement is set to Span. Ripple is a difference between maximum and minimum levels that are in the wavelength range set to Span.

Figure 5.9.3-5 Measurement Method for Ripple

Cut Level

BW

CH Wl

Cut Level

Pass-Band Span

Pass Band

CH Wl

Ripple

Span

Page 232: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-94

5.9.4 Procedures In this example, Trace A is used to measure the spectrum of the light source, and Trace B is used to measure the spectrum of the light passed through the WDM filter. The waveform obtained by subtracting Trace A from Trace B is saved as Trace C. The WDM filter analysis is performed on the waveform of Trace C.

When measuring the WDM filter, use a light source having a broadband spectrum and a good level stability.

Figure 5.9.4-1 Measuring System for the WDM Filter

To obtain the waveform data of the WDM filter 1. Power on the light source and warm it up until the level stabilizes. 2. Connect two optical fiber cords and an optical adapter, as shown in

Figure 5.9.4-1 (a). 3. Press F6 Trace, f1 Active Trace, and f1 A, in this order, and Trace A

becomes the active trace. 4. Set the wavelength, resolution, and level scale. 5. Press Single or Repeat. The data is saved to Trace A. 6. Press f2 Trace Type and f2 Fix, in this order. 7. Connect the WDM filter as shown in Figure 5.9.4-1 (b). 8. Press f1 Active Trace and f2 B, in this order, and Trace B becomes

the active trace. 9. Press Single or Repeat. The data is saved to Trace B. 10. Press f1 Active Trace and f3 C, in this order, and Trace C becomes

the active trace. 11. Press F6 Trace, f2 Trace Type, and f3 Calculate, in this order. 12. Press F6 Trace and f4 Calculation, in this order.

(a) Light Source Measurement

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

(b) Measurement of Light Passed Through WDM Filter

Optical Adapter

Optical Adapter WDM Filter

Optical Input

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer Optical Input

Light Source

Light Source

Page 233: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

5.9 Measuring WDM Filter

5-95

5 M

easurement Functions

13. Specify the formula for calculating Trace C as follows: Trace B - Trace A. The data of the WDM-filtered waveform is saved to Trace C.

To measure the WDM filter 1. When the name of the F7 horizontal key is not Application, press F8,

and then press F7. 2. Press f7 More 1/2. 3. Press f3 WDM Filter Test to display the WDM Filter Measurement

screen. 4. Press f6 Test Parameter. 5. Set the parameters in the dialog box. For the input range, refer to

Table 5.9.3-1. 6. Press f7 Set to update the values in the WDM Filter Measurement

screen. 7. Press f1 MEAS Item, f3 CH No. Next Page, f4 CH No. Last Page or f5

Display Mode to change the display range. 8. Press f6 Off to finish the WDM filter measurement.

Page 234: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 5 Measurement Functions

5-96.

Page 235: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

6-1

6 Setting O

perating Environment

Setting Operating Environment Chapter 6

This chapter explains the methods for setting and checking the instrument data as well as managing files and updating software.

6.1 Setting and Checking Instrument Data ........................ 6-2 6.1.1 Setting Interfaces and

File Operating Environment ............................. 6-2 6.1.2 Checking Instrument Data ............................... 6-7 6.1.3 Resetting System Data .................................... 6-8

6.2 Managing Files ........................................................... 6-9 6.3 Updating Software .................................................... 6-11

Page 236: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 6 Setting Operating Environment

6-2

6.1 Setting and Checking Instrument Data 6.1.1 Setting Interfaces and File Operating Environment

The following operations and information can be checked.

● Remote control interfaces ● Saving screen files ● Operation sounds To set or check these data, press F8 to display Config to the horizontal function key, and then press F6.

To set and confirm interface for remote control 1. Press f1 Interface Settings. 2. The dialog box shown in Figure 6.1.1-1 is displayed.

Move between setting items using the arrow keys and select the setting.

GPIB Settings: This is displayed when the GPIB option is added. The MS9740B GPIB address can set in the range of 1 to 30 using a rotary knob.

Ethernet Settings: IP Address: Displays MS9740B IP address Subnet Mask: Displays sub-net mask Host Name: Displays computer name of MS9740B The value displayed in Ethernet Settings cannot be changed at this screen. These values are changed from the Windows Control Panel.

Note: If MS9740B is not linked up to the network (LAN), its IP address is not displayed.

Terminator Settings:

This character string is handled as the terminator of the communication data. CR/LF: ASCII code carriage return and line feed LF: ASCII code line feed None (EOI Only): Does not use terminator. The data end is

detected using the GPIB signal line EOI (End Or Identify).

Page 237: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

6.1 Setting and Checking Instrument Data

6-3

6 Setting O

perating Environment

3. Press f7 Set to change the GPIB address and communication data terminator to the values set at step 2.

Figure 6.1.1-1 Interface Settings Dialog Box

Page 238: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 6 Setting Operating Environment

6-4

To set and check the method for saving the display file saved by the Copy key: 1. Press f2 Copy Settings.

The dialog box shown in Figure 6.1.1-2 is displayed. Move between setting items using the arrow keys and select the setting.

File Type Settings: This sets the extension of the display file. BMP: Saves as bitmap file that can be read by most graphics

editing software PNG: Saves as Portable Network Graphic file, which has a

smaller file size than a bmp file. Color Settings:

This sets the screen color to be saved. Normal: Saves as screen display image color. Reverse: Saves as reverse-displays image

File Name Settings: This sets the method for naming the file each time the Copy key is pressed. Data + sequential number (000-999):

Appends sequential number in range 000 to 999 to Data string

User-Specified Name: Displays file name input dialog box and input file name

2. Press f7 Set to change the display file save method to the value set at step 1.

Page 239: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

6.1 Setting and Checking Instrument Data

6-5

6 Setting O

perating Environment

Figure 6.1.1-2 Copy Setting Dialog Box

To set and check the operation sounds: 1. Press f3 System Settings.

The dialog box shown in Figure 6.1.1-3 is displayed. Beep Sound Settings:

This sets the operation sounds on and off using arrow keys. On: Operation sound at message display Off: No operation sound at message display

2. Press f7 Set to change the operation sounds.

Page 240: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 6 Setting Operating Environment

6-6

Figure 6.1.1-3 System Settings Dialog Box

Page 241: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

6.1 Setting and Checking Instrument Data

6-7

6 Setting O

perating Environment

6.1.2 Checking Instrument Data The following information can be checked.

● Serial number ● Software version ● Optical unit version ● Package version ● Software license ● Option To confirm this information, press F8 to display Config to the horizontal function key, and then press F6.

To display serial number, software version, package version and optical unit version 1. Press f5 System Info. 2. Press f1 System Info View. The following values are displayed on the

screen. Serial Number Package Version Software Version Optical Unit Version

3. Press f8 Close to close the screen. To display software license 1. Press f5 System Info. 2. Press f4 Software License View. The license name is displayed on

the screen. 3. Press f8 Close to close the screen. To display option information 1. Press f6 Option Info. The following values are displayed on the

screen. Option Number Option Switch Option Name

2. Press f8 Close to close the screen.

Page 242: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 6 Setting Operating Environment

6-8

To save product information file The option information and software version can be saved in the file. This saved file calls “system information file”.

1. Press F8 to display Config on the horizontal function key. 2. Press F6. 3. Press f5 System Info. 4. Press f7 More 1/2. 5. Press f6 System Information Save, and then the system information

file is saved. The system information file is required when contacting our sales representatives.

6.1.3 Resetting System Data The following settings can be changed to the defaults listed in Appendix B. During the changing process, the user data saved to the internal hard disk is deleted. This processing is called Resetting System Settings.

● Setting values for Information Settings ● Setting values for Copy Settings ● Setting values for System Settings

CAUTION User data deleted at system reset cannot be recovered. Before resetting the system settings, always save the user data to another external drive.

1. Press f5 System Info. 2. Press f7 More 1/2 to display System Reset. 3. Press f1 System Reset to display the dialog on the screen. 4. A system reset is executed by selecting Reset with the arrow keys

and pressing Enter. Select Cancel and press Enter to cancel System Reset.

5. The MS9740B shuts down after resetting the system. 6. Turn on the power again to continue measurement.

Page 243: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

6.2 Managing Files

6-9

6 Setting O

perating Environment

6.2 Managing Files The following operations can be performed on measurement result files and system data files.

● Copy ● Move ● Delete ● Setting and releasing write protection To display file operation screen, press F8 and display Config on the horizontal function keys. And then, press F6 and f7 File Operation, respectively.

To operate file 1. Select the drive to operate the file.

(a) Press f1 Device to display the dialog box. (b) Select the drive in the dialog box using arrow keys, and press f7

Set. 2. Select the file type to be operated.

(a) Press f3 Image to select the image file. (b) Press f4 XML to select the XML file. (c) Press f5 CSV to select the CSV file. (d) Press f7 System Info to select the system information file. The message is displayed when the file does not exist in the drive.

3. Select the file. (a) If the file name is displayed in the dialog box, move the cursor to

the file with the arrow keys. (b) Press Enter to check the check box. To select or release all displayed files, press f3 Select All.

4. Select the operation for the file. (a) Press f4 File Protect to protect writing the file.

A message is displayed to confirm the file save change. Select Change with the arrow keys and press the Enter key to change the file protect settings

(b) To move a file on drive D, press f5 Move to USB. A message is displayed to confirm the file move and destination devise name. Select Move with the arrow keys and press the Enter key to move the file to the moved devise destination.

Page 244: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 6 Setting Operating Environment

6-10

(c) To copy a file that is not on drive D to the internal hard disk:, press f5 Copy to HDD. A message is displayed to confirm the file copied. Select Copy with the arrow keys and press the Enter key to delete the file.

(d) To delete a file, press f6 Delete. A message is displayed to confirm the file deleted. Select Yes with the arrow keys and press the Enter key to delete the file. When Protect for the selected file is set to Off, the file can be deleted.

Note: Write-protected files cannot be erased.

When drive D: is selected at step 1, f5 becomes Move to USB. When a drive other than D; is selected, f5 becomes Copy to HDD.

Figure 6.2-1 File List Display

Page 245: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

6.3 Updating Software

6-11

6 Setting O

perating Environment

6.3 Updating Software Software can be updated using the following procedures. ● Prepare a USB memory stick for the installation. ● Update the software. ● Update the software license. Notes:

● Do not remove the USB memory while installing the software. When the software is updated, the wavelength calibration data resets to the default value.

● Do not install the MS9740A software. If you have installed the MS9740A software by mistake, restore the hard disk drive referring to 2.10.3 “Restoring Hard Disk Drive”. Then install the MS9740B software.

To prepare USB memory for instillation 1. Download this software from the Anritsu website.

(https://www.anritsu.com/en-US/test-measurement/support/downloads) 2. Extract the downloaded file. 3. Copy the extracted file to the USB memory. If the USB memory stick

is drive E:, the file is copied to the following folder "E:\Anritsu Corporation\Optical Spectrum Analyzer\Install"

The installation instructions are included in the extracted file. For detailed information, refer to the installation instructions.

To display updating software screen 1. Press F8 to display Config on the horizontal function keys, and press

F6. 2. Press f8 More 1/2. 3. Press f1 Software Install. To update software 1. Connect the USB memory for installation to the MS9740B. 2. The updating software window is displayed. 3. Press f1 Software Install to open the drive selection screen. 4. Select the USB memory drive using the arrow keys, and press f7 Set. 5. The install confirmation dialog opens.

The software to be installed is displayed on the upper field and the installed software is displayed on the lower field. If the installed software is not displayed on the screen, press f3 Focus Change to select the lower field and scroll the screen using the arrow keys.

Page 246: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 6 Setting Operating Environment

6-12

6. Press f1 Install. 7. When “Do you install an application software?” is displayed, select

Yes using the arrow keys or rotary knob, and then press Enter. If you want to stop installing the software, select No and press Enter.

8. When the software installation is complete, the power is turned off automatically.

9. Turn on the power again. 10. Check the version changed. For how to confirm the version, refer to 6.1.2 “Checking Instrument Data”. The measurement conditions and calibration value are initialized when the software is updated. Files saved to drive D: are not erased or changed by updating software. To update software license 1. Connect the USB memory for installation to MS9740B. 2. The updating software window is displayed. 3. Press f3 Software License Install to open the drive selection window. 4. Select the USB memory drive using the arrow keys, and then press f7

Set. 5. When the file name is displayed in the dialog box, move the cursor

using the arrow keys. Press f2 Select All to select all files displayed. 6. When the confirmation dialog box for the installation is opened, press

f1 Install. 7. Restart Windows after finishing the installation to validate the

license.

Page 247: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

6.3 Updating Software

6-13

6 Setting O

perating Environment

Note: 1. When the software version saved in the USB memory for

installation is the same as the currently installed software version, pressing f1 Install displays the password inputting window.

2. When installation is continued, enter “ms9740a_osa” using the key board. Select Next using the key board or mouse and press Enter. When terminating installation, select Cancel and press Enter.

3. The confirmation window for software uninstallation is displayed. Select Yes and press Enter.

Page 248: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 6 Setting Operating Environment

6-14.

4. The message is displayed after uninstallation is completed. Select Finish and press Enter.

5. Display the USB memory folder (E:\Anritsu Corporation\Optical Spectrum Analyzer\Install).

6. Double-clicking Setup.exe starts installation. 7. After installation is complete, the power is turned off

automatically. 8. Turn on the power again.

Page 249: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

7-1

7 Perform

ance Test and Maintenance

Performance Test and Maintenance Chapter 7

This chapter describes calibration, performance tests, and maintenance procedures.

7.1 Calibration .................................................................. 7-2 7.2 Performance Test ....................................................... 7-3

7.2.1 Wavelength Accuracy...................................... 7-5 7.2.2 Level Accuracy ................................................ 7-6 7.2.3 Dynamic Range .............................................. 7-7

7.3 Replacement of Optical Connector .............................. 7-8 7.4 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning .............. 7-10 7.5 Daily Maintenance .................................................... 7-14 7.6 Cautions on Storage MS9740B for Extended Period . 7-15 7.7 Transporting and Disposal ........................................ 7-16 7.8 Troubleshooting ........................................................ 7-17

Page 250: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance

7-2

7.1 Calibration There are two calibration systems.

● Calibration before use Refer to 3.1 “Calibrating Before Measurement”.

● Calibration of equipment performance Use an instrument with guaranteed optical wavelength and level to assure that the MS9740B meets the performance specification. Even though the MS9740B is operating normally, calibrate periodically at regular intervals to maintain the performance specification. The following two items should be calibrated by the user: ‐ Wavelength accuracy ‐ Level accuracy The MS9740B requires calibration of performance once or twice a year. Contact Anritsu Customer Service for periodic calibration of performance.

Page 251: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

7.2 Performance Test

7-3

7 Perform

ance Test and Maintenance

7.2 Performance Test The following items are tested to confirm the performance of MS9740B. ● Wavelength Accuracy (Refer to 7.2.1) ● Level Accuracy (Refer to 7.2.2) ● Dynamic Range (Refer to 7.2.3) Clean all optical connectors before testing performance.

Warm MS9740B up for at least two hours, and then calibrate it, before running performance tests. For details on the calibration, refer to 3.1 “Calibrating Before Measurement”. The Repeat sweeping should be performed at Span 100 nm or more and VBW 10 kHz or more during the warm-up operation.

After turning on measuring instruments to be used for the performance tests, wait for a while until they satisfy their performances.

Run the performance tests within the operating temperatures for MS9740B and the measuring instruments to be used.

For the specifications of wavelength and level accuracy, refer to Appendix A “Specifications”. Furthermore, to record the test result, use Appendix F “Performance Test Result Form”.

Page 252: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance

7-4

Table 7.2-1 Measurement Instrument List for Performance Test

Test Item Measurement Instrument Required Performance Recommended Model

(Model Name) Wavelength accuracy

Wavelength tunable laser source

Wavelength range: 1520 to 1620 nm Setting resolution: 1 pm Wavelength stability: ±1pm

8164B+81606A (Keysight Technologies)

Wavelength meter

Wavelength range: 1250 to 1650 nm Wavelength accuracy: ±0.5 ppm

671BNIR (Bristol Instruments)

Single mode Optical fiber coupler

Wavelength range: 1520 to 1620 nm Branch ratio: 50:50 Fiber: SM fiber

Level accuracy

Light source Light emitting device: DFB-LD wavelength: 1310±10 nm Level: –3 dBm or more Level stability: 0.05 dB or more

S3FC1310 (Thorlabs)

Wavelength tunable laser source

Level: –3 dBm or more Level stability: 0.05 dB or more

8164B+81606A (Keysight Technologies)

Optical power meter

Wavelength range: 1250 to 1600 nm Level range: ±10 to –60 dBm Level linearity: ±0.015 dB Level accuracy: ±4.5%

8163B + 81634B (Keysight Technologies)

Optical attenuator

Wavelength range: 1200 to 1700 nm Input loss: 5 dB or less Maximum attenuation: 60 dB

8163B + 81570A (Keysight Technologies)

Optical fiber Single mode fiber (ITU-T G652) /Master FC connector

Dynamic range

Wavelength tunable laser source

Wavelength range: 1520 to 1620 nm Setting resolution: 1 pm SMSR: ≥ 60 dB Rate between signal and ASE ≥ 70 dB/nm

8164B+81606A (Keysight Technologies)

Wavelength filter

3 dB bandwidth: 0.5 nm 20 dB bandwidth: 1.6 nm

Optical fiber Single mode fiber (ITU-T G.652)

Page 253: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

7.2 Performance Test

7-5

7 Perform

ance Test and Maintenance

7.2.1 Wavelength Accuracy

Figure 7.2.1-1 Wavelength Accuracy Test Setup

Be sure to perform the optical axis automatic adjustment and wavelength calibration. Follow the test procedures below.

1. Setup and connect as shown in Figure 7.2.1-1. 2. Set the output of the tunable laser source to CW. 3. Set the wavelength of the tunable laser source to 1550.00 nm. 4. Measure the wavelength with a wavelength meter and record it. 5. Set the following values to the MS9740B, and press Single.

Center 1550 nm, Span 1 nm, Res 0.05 nm Sampling Points 1001 6. Press Peak Search. Record the peak wavelength. 7. Repeat steps (3) thru (6) for the following wavelengths. Set the

following wavelengths for Center in step 5. 1520.00 nm, 1530.00 nm, 1540.00 nm, 1560.00 nm, 1570.00 nm,

1580.00 nm, 1590.00 nm, 1600.00 nm, 1610.00 nm, 1620.00 nm 8. Calculate the difference between the values measured at step 4 and

step 6. 9. Check that the value calculated in step 8 satisfies the following

specifications for wavelength accuracy.

Wavelength tunable laser

source

Wavelength meter

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Single mode Optical coupler

Page 254: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance

7-6

7.2.2 Level Accuracy

Figure 7.2.2-1 Level Accuracy Test Setup

Test using the following procedures.

1. Connect the MS9740B and the wavelength tunable laser source as shown in Figure 7.2.2-1.

2. Set the wavelength of the light source and optical power meter to 1550 nm.

3. Set the output of the light source to CW and On. 4. Connect the output of the optical attenuator to the optical power

meter. 5. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator to display –10 ±0.1

dBm at the optical power meter display. Record the display value. 6. Connect the output of the optical attenuator to the main frame. 7. Set the following values to the MS9740B, and press Single.

Center 1550 nm, Span 0.3 nm, Res 0.1 nm, VBW 100 Hz, Sampling Points 501

8. Press Peak Search. Record the wavelength and level. 9. Connect to the 1310 nm light source and set the wavelength of the

optical power meter to 1310 nm. 10. Repeat steps 3 thru 8 for the following wavelengths. Set to

wavelength of 1310 nm light source for Center in step 7. 11. Calculate the difference between the values measured at step 5 and

step 8. 12. Check that the value calculated in step 11 satisfies the following

specifications for level accuracy.

Wavelength tuanable laser source

Optical power meter

MS9740B Optical

Spectrum Analyzer

Optical attenuator

1310 nm light sorce

Single mode fiber Master FC connector

Page 255: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

7.2 Performance Test

7-7

7 Perform

ance Test and Maintenance

7.2.3 Dynamic Range

Figure 7.2.3-1 Dynamic Range Performance Test Setup

Perform the test as follows:

1. Connect the test equipment to the MS9740B as shown in Figure 7.2.3-1.

2. Adjust the wavelength tunable laser source to 1550 nm. 3. Set the output of the wavelength tunable laser source to On. 4. Set the following values to the MS9740B and press Single.

Res 0.05 nm, VBW100 Hz, Span 2.5 nm, Sampling Points 2001 5. Press Peak Search. 6. Press Marker Select. 7. Press f6 ΔMkr. Display the Δ markers and move the markers to the

positions for measuring the wavelength difference. 8. Record the level of the Δ markers. 9. Switch to the high dynamic range mode and repeat steps 1 to 8. 10. Evaluate whether the measurement results satisfy the specifications.

Wavelength tunable laser

source

MS9740B Optical Spectrum

Analyzer

Wavelength filter

Page 256: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance

7-8

7.3 Replacement of Optical Connector The standard optical connector is the FC type. The optical connector of the plug-in unit and pull-out type optical sensor can be removed and replaced with another connector (sold separately), and its interior can be cleaned. For more information about the connector type, refer to Figure 7.3-1 Connector Type.

Figure 7.3-1 Connector Type

WARNING Do not look into the connection surface of the optical fiber cable of the light source optical connector or the end face of the optical fiber cable connected to the light source as invisible laser light output may cause visual deficits and other problems.

CAUTION Before replacing the optical fiber cable, be sure not to damage the connector and connection surface with connector.

SC

ST

DIN

FC

Page 257: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

7.3 Replacement of Optical Connector

7-9

7 Perform

ance Test and Maintenance

To remove the optical connector: 1. Open the cover. 2. Pull up the connector lever toward you. 3. Check that the latch has been released, and then gently pull the

connector out straight toward you.

Figure 7.3-2 How to Remove the Optical Connector

Lever

Latch

Cover

Page 258: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance

7-10

7.4 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning Cleaning the Ferrule End Surface Use an approved adapter cleaner to clean the ferrule end surface in the optical connector. The ferrule in the optical connectors needs periodic cleaning. Although the following procedures use the FC connector and adapter as an example, use the same methods when cleaning other connector and adapter types.

1. Remove the currently connected adapter by raising the adapter lever (you will hear a “click” when the latch disengages) and then gently pull the adapter straight towards you.

Figure 7.4-1 Cleaning the Ferrule End Surface 1

2. Moisten an adapter cleaner with isopropyl alcohol and then use it to clean the end surface and sides of the ferrule.

Figure 7.4-2 Cleaning the Ferrule End Surface 2

Latch

Adapter lever

Adapter cleaner

Page 259: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

7.4 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning

7-11

7 Perform

ance Test and Maintenance

3. Press the tip of a new (dry) adapter cleaner into the ferrule end surface and then wipe in one direction 2 or 3 times to dry the surface.

Figure 7.4-3 Cleaning the Ferrule End Surface 3

4. Clean the adapter interior with adapter cleaner. (Refer to “Cleaning the Optical Adapter” below.)

5. Attach the adapter in the reverse order. Be careful not to scratch the ferrule end surface.

Cleaning the Optical Adapter Use an approved adapter cleaner to clean the optical adapter for connecting to the optical fiber fable. Although the following procedures use the FC connector and adapter as an example, use the same methods when cleaning other connector and adapter types.

Insert adapter cleaner into the split sleeve of the optical adapter. Rotate the adapter cleaner in one direction while moving it back and forth.

Figure 7.4-4 Cleaning the Ferrule End Surface 4

Note:

Check the ferrule diameter and use a cleaner only for the 1.25 mm or 2.5 mm adapter.

Page 260: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance

7-12

Cleaning the Optical Fiber Cable Ferrule End Surface Use an approved ferrule cleaner to clean the optical fiber cable ferrule of the end surface. Although the following procedures use the FC connector and adapter as an example, use the same methods when cleaning other connector and adapter types.

1. Pull the ferrule cleaner lever to expose the cleaning surface.

Figure 7.4-5 Ferrule Cleaner – details 1

2. Hold the lever in the opened position, press the optical connector ferrule end into the cleaning surface, and then rub in one direction as shown in the following figure.

Figure 7.4-6 Ferrule Cleaner – details 2

General Notes on Cleaning ● Do not clean with a used ferrule cleaner. ● Do not finish cleaning with a swab as the swab fibers may adhere. ● Cap the cleaned connector.

Ferrule cleaner Lever

Cleaning surface

Page 261: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

7.4 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning

7-13

7 Perform

ance Test and Maintenance

WARNING Check that no light is being emitted when cleaning and checking the ferrule end surface.

CAUTION The MS9740B may not satisfy performance when used with dirt or dust adhering to the ferrule end surface. In addition, the connected fiber and/or the MS9740B ferrule end surface may be burned if high output light is emitted in this state. Fully clean the fiber to be connected and the MS9740B ferrule end surface before measurement.

Page 262: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance

7-14

7.5 Daily Maintenance Before daily maintenance of the MS9740B, be sure to turn the power off and unplug it from the AC outlet.

Panel surface dirt When surface dirt is noticeable, after the MS9740B has been used in a dusty environment, or when the MS9740B has not been used for an extended period of time, wipe its surface with a cloth moistened in detergent and wrung enough.

Screen surface dirt If the screen surface is dirty, first wipe it dry with a soft cloth. If the dirt persists, wipe the surface gently with a cloth dipped in detergent and wrung enough.

Loose screws Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten screws.

Page 263: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

7.6 Cautions on Storage MS9740B for Extended Period

7-15

7 Perform

ance Test and Maintenance

7.6 Cautions on Storage MS9740B for Extended Period Wipe off dust, fingerprint marks, stains, spots, etc. from the surface of the MS9740B before storing it.

Fit the protective front cover before storage. Put the power cord, CD-ROM and other accessories in the accessory box and store it with the main frame.

Avoid storing the MS9740B in these places:

● Places that are exposed to direct sunlight ● Dusty places ● Damp places where condensation may occur on the MS9740B surface ● Places where the MS9740B may be corroded by active gases ● Places where the MS9740B may be oxidized ● Places where the MS9740B may be exposed to strong vibration and

shock ● Places where the MS9740B might topple over. ● Places with temperatures and relative humidity in the following

ranges: Temperature: lower than −20°C or higher than 60°C Humidity: 90% or more

Recommended storage conditions It is recommended that the MS9740B be stored in a place that meets the ambient conditions suggested above, plus the following conditions, if it is not to be used for a long period of time:

● Temperature: 5 to 45°C ● Humidity: 40 to 80% ● Little temperature and humidity fluctuations within one day

Page 264: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance

7-16

7.7 Transporting and Disposal The following describes precautions for transporting and disposing of the MS9740B.

Repackaging Repack the MS9740B in the packing material (box) in which it was delivered. If the packing material has been thrown away or damaged, repack the MS9740B in the following manner:

1. Get a corrugated cardboard, wooden, or aluminum box large enough to pack cushioning material in around the MS9740B.

2. Wrap the MS9740B in plastic or a similar material to avoid water droplets and dust.

3. Put the MS9740B in the box. 4. Pack the MS9740B in cushioning material so it does not move in the

box. 5. Secure the outside of the box with packing cord, adhesive tape, bands,

or other similar materials. Transporting Avoid vibrations as much as possible and meet the recommended storage conditions during transport. When transporting using the application part B0640A Carrying Case, make sure to attach the front protection cover that accompanied the Carrying Case to the MS9740B. Disposal Follow the instructions of your local waste disposal office when disposing of the MS9740B.

Page 265: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

7.8 Troubleshooting

7-17

7 Perform

ance Test and Maintenance

7.8 Troubleshooting Check the items in Table 7.8-1 if a failure occurs during operation of the MS9740B.

If the failure is not improved, contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office immediately. Contact information can be found on the last page of the printed version of this manual, and is available in a separate file on the PDF version.

Table 7.8-1 Check Items

Phenomenon Possible cause Action Power switch lamp not lit orange

Abnormal/no voltage at power outlet

Check power supply circuit breakers and board.

Power cord not fully inserted into power outlet or inlet

Connect the power cord correctly. Change a damaged power cord.

Cannot connect optical fiber cord

Fiber and main frame have incompatible connectors

Change the fiber type or change the optical connector of the main frame.

Optical fiber cord not connected correctly

Check the connector insertion.

Waveform does not change when Single or Repeat pressed

Trace set to not display at Write

Change the trace display settings.

When external pulse trigger set to ON, pulse not input to Ext Trigger connector

Set Ext Trigger Delay to Off or check the waveform of the signal input to Ext Trigger.

Waveform not displayed

When using external trigger, measures at optical level Off timing

Set Ext Trigger Delay to Off.

Dirty optical connector Clean the optical connector. All traces set to Display Off Set the trace display to On.

Trace type set to Blank Set at least one trace type to Write. Long sweep time Rx optical bandwidth set too

narrow For a short sweep time, refer to Appendix E “Video Band Width and Sweep Time” and increase the Rx optical bandwidth.

Point averaging set For a short sweep time, decrease the point average count.

Large sampling points set For a short sweep time, decrease the sampling points.

High dynamic range mode set For a short sweep time, change the dynamic range mode to Normal.

Page 266: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance

7-18

Table 7.8-1 Check Item (Cont'd)

Phenomenon Possible cause Action Incorrect measured spectrum waveform

Incorrect resolution Set a small resolution for light sources with a narrow spectrum like LDs.

Too many smoothing points Set smoothing to Off or reduce the number of smoothing points

Displaying memory calculation

Set the trace display to Wri.

MM Mode set to On Set MM Mode to Off. Incorrect measured spectrum wavelength

Wavelength not calibrated Calibrate as described in 3.1 “Calibrating Before Measurement”.

Wavelength display in air/vacuum incorrect

Set the desired wavelength display.

Low measured spectrum level

Fiber cord or optical connector dirty

Clean as described in 7.4 “Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning”.

SM fiber connected instead of MM fiber

Use MM fiber for light sources requiring MM fiber.

Fiber cord damaged or under excessive tension, etc.

Do not bend the fiber cord or put heavy objects on it.

Fiber cord not inserted into connector correctly

Insert the fiber cord into the connector correctly.

Noisy optical waveform at low level measurement

Wide Rx optical bandwidth Set a narrower Rx bandwidth.

Resolution too narrow for wideband spectrum light source such as LD

Set an appropriate resolution

ATT set to On Set ATT to Off. Peak point not found by Peak Search

Peak point outside zone markers

Set the zone markers to Off or move the peak point into the range of the zone markers.

Analysis processing not executed for entire waveform

Zone markers set Set the zone markers to Off or change Zone Center so that the part to be analyzed is between the zone markers.

Analysis cut or slice level too small

Set the cut or slice level to include the range to be analyzed.

Measurement data not saved

Storage device write-protected

Remove the write protection.

Storage device full Change the storage device or delete some files.

Destination folder set to read only

Change the folder properties.

Page 267: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

7.8 Troubleshooting

7-19

7 Perform

ance Test and Maintenance

Table 7.8-1 Check Item (Cont'd)

Phenomenon Possible cause Action Cannot save measurement data

File set to read only Change the file properties. Storage device write-protected

Remove the write protection.

Destination folder set to read only

Change the folder properties.

Incorrect date and time

Windows time clock set incorrectly

Open the Windows Control Panel, double-click the Time and Date icon and set the correct time and date.

Unable to control remotely

Incorrect Ethernet or GPIB address

Set the Ethernet or GPIB address as described in 6.1 “Setting and Checking Instrument Data”.

Another device with same GPIB address connected

Set a unique GPIB address as described in 6.1 “Setting and Checking Instrument Data”.

Used 2-byte character (space, comma, hyphen) in command

Check commands for illegal characters. 2-byte spaces cannot be used.

Page 268: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Chapter 7 Performance Test and Maintenance

7-20.

Page 269: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

A-1

Appendix A

Appendix A Specifications

A.1 Specifications Table A.1-1 Configurations

Item Specifications Model Name MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Configuration -Main Frame-

MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer -Option- MS9740B-001/101/201 GPIB Interface MS9740B-002/102/202 Light Source for Wavelength Calibration -Connector Options- MS9740B-037 FC Connector MS9740B-038 ST Connector MS9740B-039 DIN Connector MS9740B-040 SC Connector Standard Accessories - Power Cord 1 Z2024A MS9740B Operation Manual (CD) * 1 TAA-1CT140003 Microsoft Software License Terms

(WES7) 1

* The mainframe and remote control manuals are included in the MS9740B Operation Manual CD.

Page 270: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix A Specifications

A-2

Table A.1-2 Optical Characteristics*1

Item Specifications Applicable optical fiber SM fiber (ITU-T G.652), GI fiber (50/125 µm),

PC Connector (return loss 40 dB or more when connected) SM/GI fiber described hereafter means this specified fiber.

Wavelength Wavelength range 600 nm to 1750 nm Wavelength sweep width

0.2 nm to 1200 nm, 0 nm

Wavelength accuracy After Wl Cal (Ext) execution ±300 pm ( 600 to 1520 nm) ±200 pm (1520 to 1570 nm) ±300 pm (1570 to 1750 nm)

When installing the light source for wavelength calibration (option): Using SM fiber after Wl Cal (Ref)

Resolution 0.5, 1.0 nm: ±100 pm (1520 to 1620 nm) Resolution other than 0.5, 1.0 nm: ±20 pm (1520 to 1620 nm)

Wavelength stability ±5 pm or less Using SM fiber with half-width of center wavelength and 11 pt smoothing during 1-minute period

Wavelength linearity ±20 pm (1520 to 1620 nm) Resolution

Setting resolution 0.03, 0.05, 0.07, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1.0 nm (0.03, 0.05 nm only 1550-nm band and room temperature)

Resolution accuracy Resolution accuracy at Center wavelength for displayed Actual resolution 1) Using SM fiber after Res-Cal at 1520 to 1620 nm ±7% (Resolution 0.1 nm) ±3% (Resolution 0.2 nm) ±2.2% (Resolution 0.5 nm) 2) Using SM fiber after Res-Cal at 600 to 1520 nm and 1620 to 1750 nm ±30% (Resolution 0.1 nm) ±15% (Resolution 0.2 nm) ±7% (Resolution 0.5 nm)

*1: After warming up for at least 2 hours after power-on (the Repeat sweeping performed at Span 100 nm or more and VBW 10 kHz or more during the warm-up operation) and performing automatic adjustment of optical axis, with wavelength calibration (hereafter, WI Cal), and constant temperature

Page 271: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

A.1 Specifications

A-3

Appendix A

Table A.1-2 Optical Characteristics*1 (Cont'd)

Item Specifications Level

Measurement level*2 When optical attenuation is Off: 5 to 30°C

–65 to +10 dBm ( 600 to 1000 nm) –85 to +10 dBm (1000 to 1250 nm) –90 to +10 dBm (1250 to 1600 nm) –85 to +10 dBm (1600 to 1650 nm) –65 to +10 dBm (1650 to 1700 nm) –55 to +10 dBm (1700 to 1750 nm)

30 to 45°C –60 to +10 dBm ( 600 to 1000 nm) –80 to +10 dBm (1000 to 1250 nm) –85 to +10 dBm (1250 to 1600 nm) –80 to +10 dBm (1600 to 1650 nm) –60 to +10 dBm (1650 to 1700 nm) –50 to +10 dBm (1700 to 1750 nm)

When optical attenuation is On: 5 to 30°C

–70 to +23 dBm (1100 to 1600 nm) 30 to 45°C

–65 to +23 dBm (1100 to 1600 nm) Measurement level accuracy

±0.4 dB At min. setting resolution of 0.1 nm with –10 dBm input, using SM fiber (master connector) with wavelength of 1310 or 1550 nm and 23 ±5°C

Measurement level stability

±0.02 dB During 1-minute period at min. setting resolution of 0.1 nm with –23 dBm input, using SM fiber with wavelength of 1550 nm, no change in polarization

Level linearity When optical attenuation is Off: ±0.05 dB Using SM fiber with wavelength of 1550 nm at –50 to 0 dBm

When optical attenuation = On: ±0.05 dB Using SM fiber with wavelength of 1550 nm at –30 to +20 dBm

Flatness ±0.1 dB With optical attenuator Off, using SM fiber, at setting resolution of 0.5 nm with wavelength of 1520 to 1620 nm and 10 to 30°C

Polarization dependency

±0.05 dB (1550 nm, 1600 nm) ±0.1 dB (1310 nm)

Using SM fiber at setting resolution of 0.5 nm or more.

*2: VBW = 10 Hz, Sweep average = 10, Resolution = 0.07 nm or more (when using SM fiber)

Page 272: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix A Specifications

A-4

Table A.1-2 Optical Characteristics*1 (Cont'd)

Item Specifications Level (Cont’d)

Dynamic range*3 High dynamic range mode

70 dB At ±1 nm from peak wavelength

60 dB At ±0.4 nm from peak wavelength

42 dB At ±0.2 nm from peak wavelength

Normal dynamic range mode

62 dB At ±1 nm from peak wavelength

58 dB At ±0.4 nm from peak wavelength

42 dB At ±0.2 nm from peak wavelength

Return loss 35 dB Using SM fiber with wavelength of 1310 and 1550 nm

Sweep time 0.3 s or less /500 nm *4,*5 Center wavelength 1200 nm

0.2 s or less /5 nm *4,*5 Center wavelength 1550 nm, resolution 0.1 nm

0.35 s /30 nm *6,*7 Typical, center wavelength 1550 nm, resolution 0.1 nm

1.65 s /30 nm *7,*8 Typical, center wavelength 1550 nm, resolution 0.1 nm

*3: With optical attenuator Off, at setting resolution of 0.05 nm and wavelength of 1550 nm and temperature of 20 to 30°C, excluding diffraction of other order of diffraction

*4: At VBW = 10 kHz, normal dynamic range mode, from sweep start to stop

*5: No optical input, and 501 sampling points or under *6: At VBW = 1 kHz Fast, from sweep start to stop *7: With optical input (Tunable Laser Source, –10 dBm, one wavelength),

and 1001 sampling points or under, normal dynamic range mode *8: At VBW = 200 Hz Fast, from sweep start to stop

Page 273: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

A.1 Specifications

A-5

Appendix A

Table A.1-3 Light Source for Wavelength Calibration (MS9740B-002)

Item Specifications Applicable optical fiber SM fiber (ITU-T G.652) Optical output level –40 dBm/nm or more

Reference wavelength light, reference light, 10 to 30°C, 1550 ±20 nm, 1 nm setting resolution

Output level stability ±0.04 dB 10 minutes after setting output On using MS9740B and measured under following conditions: Measurement Wavelength: 1550 nm Measurement Resolution: 1 nm VBW 100 Hz Point Avg 20 Measurement time: 1 minute

Page 274: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix A Specifications

A-6

Table A.1-4 Function

Item Specification Measurement function Automatic measure,

Pulse light measurement (external trigger), Power monitor

Display functions Overlap, Normalized, Max Hold, Value in Air/Vacuum, Effective Resolution

Analysis functions Wavelength Subtraction, Marker, Wavelength Analysis (Threshold, ndB-Loss, Envelope, RMS, SMSR, Spectrum Power), Light Source Evaluation (FP-LD, DFB-LD, LED), Optical AMP NF Evaluation, PMD Measurement, WDM Signal Evaluation, Optical BPF Bandwidth Analysis

Calibration function Automatic alignment (optical axis), Wavelength calibration, Level offset function, Wavelength offset function

Memory function Measurement data Memory A to J (10 waveforms) External control function

Ethernet, GPIB (option)

Input/Output function Input/Output: Read and save files from/to USB memory Input: External trigger terminal (0 to 0.8/2 to 5 V, high

impedance), keyboard, mouse Output: Measured data text file output,

measurement screen file output, VGA output Display device 800 × 600 dots, 8.4-inch SVGA color LCD

Page 275: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

A.1 Specifications

A-7

Appendix A

Table A.1-5 Mechanical and Environmental Performance

Item Specification Dimensions 177 (H), 426 (W), 350 (D) mm, not including projection portion Mass 15.0 kg max., excluding options Power Rated voltage: AC 100 to 120/200 to 240 V

Frequency: 50/ 60 Hz Power source (capacity) 75 VA max. Temperature/ Humidity

Operating temperature: 5 to 45°C Storage Temperature: –20 to 60°C Humidity: 0 to 90% (no condensation)

Laser safety* IEC 60825-1/JISC6802 Class 1 FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 Class I

*: When MS9740B-002 Light Source for Wavelength Calibration is installed.

Page 276: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix A Specifications

A-8.

A.2 Application Parts Table A.2-1 Application Parts

Model Model Name Remarks J0008 GPIB cable, 2m J0127A Coaxial Cord (BNC-P•RG58A/U•BNC-P) 1 m J0127B Coaxial Cord (BNC-P•RG58A/U•BNC-P) 2 m J0617B Replaceable optical connector (FC) J0618D Replaceable optical connector (ST) J0618E Replaceable optical connector (DIN) J0619B Replaceable optical connector (SC) J1534A LC-SC plug-in Converter (for SM, SC(P)-LC(J)) J0635A/B/C Optical Fiber Cord (FC•PC-FC•PC-□M-SM) 1/2/3 m J0660A/B/C Optical Fiber Cord (SC•PC-SC•PC-□M-SM) 1/2/3 m J0893A/B Optical Fiber Cord (FC•PC-FC•PC-□M-GI) 1/2 m,

50/125 µm J0839A/B Optical Fiber Cord (FC•PC-SC•PC-□M-GI) 1/2 m,

50/125 µm Z0914A Ferrule cleaner (Clip:1) Z0915B Ferrule Cleaner Replacement Tape (six) Z0284 Adapter Cleaner (Stick type:200) Z0975A Keyboard (USB) Z0541A USB mouse B0640C* Carrying Case B0641A Rack Mount Kit B0671A Front Cover for 1MW4U W3998AE MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation

Manual Printed version (English)

W3999AE MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Remote Control Operation Manual

Printed version (English)

*: Front panel protective cover attached

Page 277: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

B-1

Appendix B

Appendix B Initial Values

Table B-1 Wavelength

Item Initial value Center 1350.00 nm Span 500.0 nm Start 1100.00 nm Stop 1600.00 nm Mkr Value Wl/Freq Wl Value in Air/Vacuum Vacuum

Table B-2 Level Scale

Item Initial value Scale Select Log Log (/div.) 10.0 dB/div. Reference Level 20.0 dBm Linear Scale 100.0 mW Optical Att. Off

Table B-3 Res/VBW/Avg

Item Initial value Res 1.0 nm VBW 1 kHz Point Average Off Sweep Average 1 Smooth Off Sampling Points 501 pt Actual Res Off

Table B-4 Peak/Dip Search

Item Initial value Status Off Search Threshold Auto/Manual

Auto

Peak to Peak Calculation On/Off

Off

Search Threshold 0.10 dB

Page 278: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix B Initial Values

B-2

Table B-5 Analysis

Item Initial value Status Off Threshold Cut Lvl: 3.0 dB ndB Loss ndB: 3.0 dB SMSR Side mode: 2nd Peak Envelope Cut Lvl: 3.0 dB RMS Kσ: 2.35 σ

S-Level: 20.0 dB

Table B-6 Trace

Item Initial value Active Trace A Trace Type Trace A: Write

Trace B-J: Blank Storage Mode Off Calculation Trace A = B – C

Trace B = C – D Trace C = D – E Trace D = E – F Trace E = F – G Trace F = G – H Trace G = H – I Trace H = I – J Trace I = J – A Trace J = A – B

Display On/Off On Graph Normal

Page 279: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix B Initial Values

B-3

Appendix B

Table B-7 Application - DFB-LD Test

Item Initial value Slice Level 20.0 dB Side Mode 2nd Peak Search Resolution 2.0 dB Kσ 6.07 σ ndB Width 20.0 dB

Table B-8 Application - FP-LD Test

Item Initial value Slice Level 3.0 dB

Table B-9 Application - LED Test

Item Initial value Cut Level 3.0 dB Power Cal 0.00 dB Kσ 2.35 σ

Table B-10 Application - PMD Test

Item Initial value Auto/Manual Auto Mode Cpl Factor 1 Peak Count 2

Page 280: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix B Initial Values

B-4

Table B-11 Application - WDM Test – Multi Peak

Item Initial value Display Mode SNR Signal Parameter S.Level 30.0 dB Search Threshold 0.10 dB Wavelength

Detection Type Peak

Threshold Cut Level 3.0 dB Level Detection Type Point Signal Span 0.40 nm Noise Parameter Area Type Channel Channel

Fitting Span Masked Span

0.80 nm 0.40 nm

Fitting Curve Linear Fitting Curve Display On Normalization Off Noise BW 0.1 nm Detection Type Point Point (L+R)/2 User Specify

Left Noise Position Span

Right Noise Position Span

10.00 nm 10.00 nm 10.00 nm 10.00 nm

Noise Position Off, 0.40 nm Ref No. 1 Page Top No. 1

Page 281: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix B Initial Values

B-5

Appendix B

Table B-12 Application - LD Module Test

Item Initial value Slice Level 20.0 dB SMSR Parameter 2nd Peak Kσ 6.07 σ Search Resolution 2.0 dB ndB Width 20.0 dB Signal Parameter Wavelength

Detection Type Peak

Threshold Cut Level 3.0 dB Level Detection Type Point Signal Span 0.40 nm

Signal Level Signal Noise Parameter Area Type Channel Channel

Fitting Span Masked Span

0.80 nm 0.40 nm

Fitting Curve Linear Fitting Curve Display On Noise BW 0.1 nm Detection Type Point Point (L+R)/2 User Specify

Left Noise Position Span

Right Noise Position Span

10.00 nm 10.00 nm 10.00 nm 10.00 nm

Noise Position Off, 0.40 nm

Page 282: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix B Initial Values

B-6

Table B-13 Application - Opt .AMP Test

Item Initial value Method Spect Div On Write to Pin/Pout Pin Pin A Pout B Pase C NF Select S-ASE ASE Fitting Gauss Fit Fitting Span 5.00 nm Masked Span 2.00 nm Pin Loss 0.00 dB Test Pout Loss 0.00 dB NF Calibration 1.000 O.BPF Level Calibration 0.00 dB O.BPF Band Width 3.00 nm Pol Loss 0.00 dB

Page 283: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix B Initial Values

B-7

Appendix B

Table B-14 Application - Opt .AMP Multi Test

Item Initial value ISS Method IEC Channel Parameter S.Level 30.0 dB Search Threshold 0.10 dB Wavelength

Detection Type Peak

Threshold Cut Level 3.0 dB Opt .Amp Test Parameter Detection Type Point Fitting Curve Display On Area

Fitting Curve Fitting Span Mode Fitting Span(Manual) Masked Span

Linear Auto (Center) 0.80 nm 0.60 nm

Point Fitting Span Mode Fitting Span(Manual)

Auto (Center) 0.80 nm

NF Select S-ASE Actual Resolution Initial Pin Loss 0.00 dB Pout Loss 0.00 dB O.BPF Lvl Cal 0.00 dB O.BPF BW 0.00 nm NF Calibration 1.000 Write to Pin/Pout Pin Display Mode Trace & Table Pin A Pout B

Page 284: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix B Initial Values

B-8

Table B-15 Application – WDM Filter

Item Initial value S.Level 30.0 dB Search Threshold 0.10 dB Channel Detection Type Peak Cut Level 3.0 dB Threshold Wavelength Cut Level A 3.0 dB Cut Level B 20.0 dB BW/Pass Band Analysis Type BW Cut Level A 3.0 dB Cut Level B 20.0 dB Pass-Band Span 4.00 nm Level Detection Type Point ΣPower

Signal Span 0.40 nm

Ripple Span

0.20 nm

Page 285: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix B Initial Values

B-9

Appendix B

Table B-16 Measure Mode

Item Initial value Dynamic Range Norm/Hi Norm Ext Trigger Delay Off Interval Time 0 Power Monitor Off MM Mode Off

Table B-17 Others

Item Initial value Optical Output On/Off Off Title Optical Spectrum Analyzer

Table B-18 Cal

Item Initial value Wl Offset 0 nm Level Offset 0 dB Align with cal Off Auto Cal On/Off Off Auto Offset On/Off On

Table B-19 Config

Item Initial value GPIB Address 1 IP Address 192.168.0.10 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Terminator Settings CR/LF File Type Settings BMP Color Settings Normal File Name Settings Data + sequential number

(000-999) Beep Sound Settings On

Page 286: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix B Initial Values

B-10.

Table B-20 Marker

Item Initial value λMkr_A Off, 1100.0000 nm λMkr_B Off, 1600.0000 nm LMkr_C Off, 20.000 dBm LMkr_D Off, –30.000 dBm TMkr Off, 1100.0000 nm ΔMkr Off, 1100.0000 nm

Table B-21 Zone Marker

Item Initial value Zone Center Off, 1350.000 nm Zone Width Off, 100.000 nm Zone Out/In Out

Page 287: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

C-1

Appendix C

Appendix C Message Lists

Table C-1 Error Message List

Message Phenomenon Auto CAL failed Automatic wavelength calibration failed due to

changes in temperature and pressure. Auto Cal in progress Automatic wavelength calibration is executing. Auto Measure finished unsuccessfully Automatic wavelength calibration was not

completed successfully. Auto-measuring Automatic measurement is being performed. Block data error The binary data format is incorrect. Calculation enabled only when calculation set for Trace Type of active trace

An attempt was made to set the calculation equation when the active trace type is not Calculate.

Calibrating Calibration is executing. Character data error Some unusable characters are entered. Character string too long There are too many characters in the input

string. Control CPU application error File not found

A required file was not found.

Control CPU Boot Error An error occurred during boot processing at start-up.

Control CPU Shutdown Error An error occurred during shutdown processing at power-off.

Copying An image file is being saved. Dip point not found There is no dip point. Check that the input

optical level is sufficient. Error in Optical Unit An error occurred in optical unit at start-up. Either the device has insufficient free space or the 9999 limit on saved files has been reached.

Either the disk is nearly full and has insufficient free space or the maximum number of files (9999) has been saved to disk.

Execution error An error other than parameter settings occurs. File already exists. Overwrite? There is already a file with the same name.

Overwrite the file? File not found The file was not found. File read failed The file was not read. File read failed (incorrect model) There was an error when reading the file

(number conflict). File read failed (incorrect option configuration) There was an error when reading the file (option

configuration conflict). File write failed The file was not written. Folder not found The file was not found. FPGA Config Error A FPGA Config error occurred at start-up. Illegal character in input string There is a forbidden character in the file name.

Page 288: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix C Message Lists

C-2

Table C-1 Error Message List (Cont'd)

Message Phenomenon Input title There is no file name.

Input the file name. Input value out of range The input value is outside the setting range. Invalid In Sweep-Average Execution is not supported while the Sweep

Average function is selected. Invalid wavelength The input wavelength is out of range. Item not selected A file is not selected for reading at Recall. Mass storage error A file operation error occurs.

The following errors occur when the file operation is performed in the Config: ● no specified driver ● format error ● media file full ● no file ● write-protect drive

No external storage device There is no external storage device (drive E to Z). No file selected No file has been selected for operation. Operation failed because write protected Unable to execute operation because the file is

write-protected. Operation prohibited at Analysis The operation cannot be executed while the

Analysis function is in use. Operation prohibited at Auto search threshold. Change search threshold from auto to manual.

The operation cannot be executed while the Search threshold is Auto. Change the Search threshold from Auto to Manual.

Operation prohibited at Calibration. The operation cannot be executed while calibration is in progress.

Operation prohibited at frequency unit Change unit from frequency to wavelength.

The operation cannot be executed while the marker display units are Frequency. Change the units from Frequency to Wavelength.

Operation prohibited at Linear Scale Change Linear Scale to Log Scale.

The operation cannot be executed while the level scale is set. Change from Linear scale to Log scale.

Operation prohibited at Peak Search and Dip Search

The operation cannot be executed while Peak Search and Dip Search are in progress.

Operation prohibited at Wavelength Calibration Operation prohibited at Auto Alignment

The operation cannot be executed while the wavelength calibration and auto alignment are in progress.

Operation prohibited during Auto Measure The operation cannot be executed while the auto measurement is in progress.

Operation prohibited during measurement The operation cannot be executed while the measurement is in progress.

Operation prohibited when Application selected The operation cannot be executed while the application measurement is in progress.

Page 289: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix C Message Lists

C-3

Appendix C

Table C-1 Error Message List (Cont'd)

Message Phenomenon Operation prohibited when Area specified as Noise Detection Type.

The operation cannot be executed while Detection Type for Noise Parameter is Area

Operation prohibited when Auto Cal is On. Zero Cal cannot be executed.

The operation cannot be executed while Auto Cal is On. Zero Cal cannot be executed.

Operation prohibited when Auto PMD selected The operation cannot be executed while the PMD setting is Auto.

Operation prohibited when Calculation set for Trace Type Change Trace Type to setting other than Calculation.

The following operations cannot be executed when Trace Type is set to Calculate. ● Analysis – Spectrum Power display ● Application Analysis function display

Change the Trace Type to some setting other than Calculate.

Operation prohibited when Overlap is NOT selected in Storage Mode.

The following operations cannot be executed when Trace Type is not set to Overlap. ● Erase Overlap

Operation prohibited when Overlap is selected in Storage Mode.

The following command settings to Active Trace cannot be executed when Trace Type is set to Overlap. ● Setting Trace Type to Calculate

Operation prohibited when Normalize Disp displayed

The operation cannot be executed while Normalize Disp is displayed.

Operation prohibited when Opt. Amp Application selected

The following operations cannot be executed when F6 Trace is pressed during optical amplifier evaluation. ● Active Trace setting ● Trace type setting ● Calculation setting ● Trace display On/Off setting ● Regular /Normalized display switching

Operation prohibited when Peak/Dip Search is not performed.

Operation is prohibited when either Peak or Dip search has not been executed.

Operation prohibited when Pulse Method or WDM Method in Opt. Amp Application is selected.

Operation is prohibited when either Pulse Method or WDM Method is selected at the optical amplifier application.

Operation prohibited when Spectrum Power is selected.

Operation is prohibited when the spectrum power is measured using the analysis function.

Operation prohibited when TMkr not displayed Turn TMkr on.

This operation cannot be performed when trace mask is not displayed. Set the trace mask display.

Operation prohibited when WDM Application selected

This operation cannot be performed while the WDM test is measured.

Operation prohibited when Zone Marker displayed Turn Zone Marker off.

This operation cannot be performed while the zone marker is displayed. Delete the zone marker.

Page 290: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix C Message Lists

C-4

Table C-1 Error Message List (Cont'd)

Message Phenomenon Operation prohibited while Ext.Trig. displayed This operation cannot be performed while the

external synchronized measurement is in progress.

Operation prohibited while Power Monitor displayed

This operation cannot be performed while the power monitor measurement is in progress.

Optical attenuator error An abnormality occurred in the optical attenuator at start-up.

Optical input power too high Insert attenuator or decrease input level.

The optical input level is too high. Use an optical attenuator or reduce the optical level.

Optical power too low for Optical Unit auto-adjustment. Adjust input level.

The optical input level is too low for accurate optical axis adjustment.

Optical power too low to calibrate wavelength Adjust input level.

The optical input level is too low for wavelength calibration.

Optical Unit failed alignment adjustment Optical axis adjustment cannot be performed during start-up.

Optical Unit failed auto alignment An abnormality occurred at optical axis auto adjustment at start-up.

Optical Unit failed calibration data test Contact Anritsu or representative.

There was a fault in the calibration data at start-up.

Optical Unit failed FPGA data test Contact Anritsu or representative.

There was a fault in the FPGA data at start-up.

Optical Unit failed grating control There was a fault in the grating control at start-up.

Optical Unit failed memory test at boot There was a fault in the memory test at start-up. Optical Unit failed offset adjustment Check no optical power input.

Offset adjustment failed at start-up. Check that there is no optical input.

Optical Unit failed program test Contact Anritsu or representative.

An abnormality was detected in the program test at start-up.

Option Error (**) There is an error in option xxx. Optional light source error An abnormality was detected in the light source

option at start-up. Pase enabled only when PLZN Nulling set for Method.

Pase was selected at Write to when a method other than PLZN Nulling was selected at the PMD measurement method.

Peak->Level disabled when Calculated set for Trace Type Change Trace Type to setting other than Calculation.

Peak → Level processing is not supported when Trace Type is set to Calculate. Change Trace Type to something other than Calculate.

Peak point not found There is no peak point. The recall processing was completed. Reading of the file is completed. Recalling The file is being read. Resolution bandwidth calibration failed The resolution calibration is failed. Resolution Cal in progress The resolution calibration is in progress. The save processing was completed. Saving of the file is completed.

Page 291: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix C Message Lists

C-5

Appendix C

Table C-1 Error Message List (Cont'd)

Message Phenomenon Save file name not specified The file name to be saved is not specified. Selected item is empty. There is no file on the specified device. Selected TCP Port Number busy Change TCP Port Number.

The selected TCP port number is in use. Change the TCP port number.

Set Display of Active Trace to On. Peak Search or Dip Search was executed while Active Trace was set to Display Off. Set to display the Active Trace.

Set Span larger than 0. Set the span during Zone Marker display to a value larger than 0 nm.

Slit 1 error in Optical Unit An abnormality occurred in Slit 1 at start-up. Slit 2 error in Optical Unit An abnormality occurred in Slit 2 at start-up. Specified file already exists There is already a file with the same name. Storage Mode enabled only when Write set for Trace Type of active trace

Storage Mode can only be set when Trace Type of Active Trace is Write.

Target device full The output target device is full. The file has not been selected. No file has been selected for operation. The installation execution file is not found. There is no installation file on the specified

device. The license file is not found. There is no license file on the specified device. This application has performed an illegal operation and will be shut down.

An error has caused shutdown.

This operation is not acceptable when unit of wavelength is frequency. Change unit from frequency to wavelength.

This operation cannot be performed while the displayed wavelength unit is set to frequency. Change the unit from frequency to wavelength.

Trace already in use The same trace cannot be set at Opt Amp Pin, Pout, and Pase.

Trace measurement parameters must be same to calculate between traces

Different trace measurement conditions have been set at the trace Calculation input.

Undefined error. Undefined message has occurred. Warning Warning Warning-Auto Measure clears all trace data. Continue operation?

All wavelengths are deleted when performing the automatic measurement.

Warning-changing sampling points clears all trace data. Change sampling points?

All trace data is deleted when sampling points are changed. Change sampling points?

Warning-operation sets Trace Type of Trace X to Blank. Continue operation?

Executing this processing sets the Trace X (X:A to J) trace type to Blank. Execute processing?

Warning-system reset deletes user data in D: Execute system reset?

Executing system reset deletes all data on drive D:/. Execute system reset?

Wavelength calibration failed Wavelength could not be calibrated.

Page 292: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix C Message Lists

C-6.

Page 293: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

D-1

Appendix D

Appendix D Keyboard and Mouse Operations

A keyboard and mouse can be connected to this equipment. Table D-1 shows the responses of the panel keys and keyboard. Table D-2 shows the response of the panel keys and mouse. Table D-3 shows the response of the rotary knob and mouse. Shift + F1 in the table means that the Shift key and F1 key are pressed simultaneously.

Table D-1 Responses of the Panel Keys and Keyboard

Panel key Keyboard Remarks ↑ ↓ ← →

. . (Period) – – (Minus) 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9

Center Ctrl + Alt + H

Ref Ctrl + Alt + I

Auto Measure Ctrl + Alt + A BS BS (Back Space)

Cancel Esc Center Ctrl + Alt + B Copy Ctrl + Shift + T Enter Enter

Page 294: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix D Keyboard and Mouse Operations

D-2

Table D-1 Responses of the Panel Keys and Keyboard(Cont'd)

Panel key Keyboard Remarks F1 Shift + F1 F2 Shift + F2 F3 Shift + F3 F4 Shift + F4 F5 Shift + F5 F6 Shift + F6 F7 Shift + F7 F8 Shift + F8 f1 F1 f2 F2 f3 F3 f4 F4 f5 F5 f6 F6 f7 F7 f8 F8

Local Ctrl + Alt + Q Log(/div.) Ctrl + Alt + E

Marker Select Ctrl + Alt + J Peak Search Ctrl + Alt + L

Preset Ctrl + Alt + P Ref Ctrl + Alt + F

Recall Ctrl + Alt + S Repeat Ctrl + Alt + N

Res Ctrl + Alt + D Save Ctrl + Alt + R

Single Ctrl + Alt + M Span Ctrl + Alt + C Stop Ctrl + Alt + O VBW Ctrl + Alt + G

Zone Marker Ctrl + Alt + K

Page 295: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix D Keyboard and Mouse Operations

D-3

Appendix D

Table D-2 Response of the Panel Keys and Mouse

Panel key Mouse Remarks Auto Measure Right-click Select from menu

Local Right-click Select from menu Preset Right-click Select from menu Recall Right-click Select from menu Repeat Right-click Select from menu Save Right-click Select from menu

Single Right-click Select from menu Stop Right-click Select from menu

Table D-3 Response of the rotary knob and mouse

Rotary knob Mouse wheel Remarks Counterclockwise Wheel up

Clockwise Wheel pressed

Page 296: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix D Keyboard and Mouse Operations

D-4.

Page 297: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

E-1

Appendix E

Appendix E Video Band Width and Sweep Time

Table E-1 shows the relationship between VBW, sweep time and minimum optical reception sensitivity. Table E-1 shows the reference value. These values are not guaranteed in the specification values.

Table E-1 Relationship between VBW, Sweep Time and Minimum Optical Reception

VBW Sweep Time (typ.)*1 Min. Optical Reception Sensitivity*2

1 MHz 0.2 s –40 dBm 100 kHz 0.2 s –50 dBm 10 kHz 0.2 s –60 dBm 2 kHz 0.3 s –66 dBm 1 kHz 0.5 s –70 dBm 200 Hz 2.0 s –76 dBm 100 Hz 3.5 s –80 dBm 10 Hz 32 s –90 dBm

1 kHz Fast 0.25 s –70 dBm 200 Hz Fast 1.0 s –76 dBm

*1: Wavelength range: Center 1200 nm, Span 200 nm Sampling points: 501 pt Dynamic range mode: Normal Averaging processing: Point Average 1 Optical input: None From starting to ending sweep (Measured using remote commands.)

*2: Wavelength range: 1250 nm to 1600 nm Optical attenuation: Off Averaging processing: Sweep Average 10 Ambient temperature: 5 to 30ºC Resolution : 0.07 nm or more When using a SM fiber

Setting VBW at 1 kHz Fast or 200 Hz Fast enables a faster sweep than when setting VBW at 1 kHz or 200 Hz. However, when measuring a signal of which spectral width is narrow, such as ITLA (Integrable Tunable Laser Assembly) or DFB-LD (Distribution Feedback Laser Diode), the accuracy of the wavelength and level measured at 1 kHz Fast or 200 Hz Fast may be lower than when measured at 1 kHz or 200 Hz. Therefore, before measuring a signal, confirm the waveform.

Page 298: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix E Video Band Width and Sweep Time

E-2.

Note: Even if VBW is set at 1 kHz Fast or 200 Hz Fast, when one of the following conditions is met, the sweep speed is the same as when VBW is set at 1 kHz or 200 Hz:

● Point Average is set to On.

● Dynamic Range is set to High.

● The external trigger (Ext. Trigger) is set to On.

● The settings are other than the above, but the wavelength per point is less than 4 pm.

Page 299: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

F-1

Appendix F

Appendix F Performance Test Result Form

Document number:

Test Location:

Date:

Test person in charge:

Product name: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer

Serial number:

Software version:

Option:

Power voltage: V

Power frequency: Hz

Ambient temperature °C

Relative humidity %

Instruments used: Model name Serial number

Model name Serial number

Model name Serial number

Model name Serial number

Remarks

Page 300: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix F Performance Test Result Form

F-2

F.1 Wavelength Accuracy

Table F.1-1 Wavelength Accuracy (When installing MS9740B-002) Setting Resolution: nm

Light Source Settings

Wavelength

Wavelength meter

Display value Measurement

value Minimum

value Result Maximum value

1520.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

1530.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

1540.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

1550.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

1560.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

1570.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

1580.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

1590.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

1600.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

1610.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

1620.00 nm nm nm –20 pm pm +20 pm

Page 301: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

F.1 Wavelength Accuracy

F-3

Appendix F

Table F.1-2 Wavelength Accuracy (When not installing MS9740B-002) Setting Resolution: nm

Light Source Settings

Wavelength

Wavelength meter

Display value Measurement

value Minimum

value Result Maximum value

1520.00 nm nm nm –200 pm pm +200 pm

1530.00 nm nm nm –200 pm pm +200 pm

1540.00 nm nm nm –200 pm pm +200 pm

1550.00 nm nm nm –200 pm pm +200 pm

1560.00 nm nm nm –200 pm pm +200 pm

1570.00 nm nm nm –200 pm pm +200 pm

1580.00 nm nm nm –300 pm pm +300 pm

1590.00 nm nm nm –300 pm pm +300 pm

1600.00 nm nm nm –300 pm pm +300 pm

1610.00 nm nm nm –300 pm pm +300 pm

1620.00 nm nm nm –300 pm pm +300 pm

Page 302: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix F Performance Test Result Form

F-4

F.2 Level Accuracy

Table F.2-1 Level Accuracy Setting Resolution: nm

Light Source Wavelength

Power Meter Display Value

Measurement Value

Minimum value Result Maximum

value

nm dBm dBm –0.4 dB dB +0.4 dB

nm dBm dBm –0.4 dB dB +0.4 dB

Page 303: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

F.3 Dynamic Range

F-5

Appendix F

F.3 Dynamic Range

Table F.3-1 Normal Dynamic Range Mode

∆ Marker Setting

Wavelength

Measurement Value Minimum Value Result Measurement

Uncertainty

+0.2 nm dB 42 dB dB 1 dB

+0.4 nm dB 58 dB dB 1 dB

+1.0 nm dB 62 dB dB 1 dB

–0.2 nm dB 42 dB dB 1 dB

–0.4 nm dB 58 dB dB 1 dB

–1.0 nm dB 62 dB dB 1 dB

Table F.3-2 High Dynamic Range Mode

∆ Marker Setting

Wavelength

Measurement Value Minimum Value Result Measurement

Uncertainty

+0.2 nm dB 42 dB dB 1 dB

+0.4 nm dB 60 dB dB 1 dB

+1.0 nm dB 70 dB dB 1 dB

–0.2 nm dB 42 dB dB 1 dB

–0.4 nm dB 60 dB dB 1 dB

–1.0 nm dB 70 dB dB 1 dB

Page 304: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix F Performance Test Result Form

F-6.

Page 305: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

G-1

Appendix G

Appendix G Excel Macro

from files saved in csv format.

This macro has been confirmed to work with Microsoft Excel 2010.

1. Reading csv file (a) Click File – Open… at the Excel menu. (b) Change the file type at the Open File window to a text file. (c) Choose the saved csv file and click Open.

Figure G-1 Open the File Dialog Box

2. Change the work sheet name. Change the file worksheet name to Sheet 1.

Figure G-2 Chang the File Worksheet Name

Page 306: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix G Excel Macro

G-2

3. Input the macro. (a) Click Developer – Visual Basic at the Excel menu.

(b) Click Insert – Module from the Visual Basic for Application menu. Module1 is added.

(c) Copy the macro from the following pages and paste it into the Module1 (code) window.

(d) Click File – Close and Return to Microsoft Excel from the Visual Basic for Applications menu.

4. Save the file. (a) Click File – Save As… at the Excel menu. (b) At the Save As… dialog box, change the file type to Excel

Macro-Enabled Workbook (*.xlsm). (c) Click Save.

5. Run the Macro. (a) Click Developer – Macros at the Excel menu. (b) Select Macro1 and click Run at the opened macro dialog box.

A graph sheet is created and a graph is drawn. An example is shown in Figure G-3.

Page 307: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix G Excel Macro

G-3

Appendix G

Sub Macro1() ' 'Define variables ' Dim Start_Wl, Stop_Wl, Smple_Cnt, VB_Val As Single Dim Data_Area, File_name, Date_time, Row_shift As String Dim Value_Sw, RBW, Act_RBW, VBW, Smpl_Num As String Dim Avr_Sw, Smooth_Sw, OptATT_Sw, D_Range_SW As String Dim Trc_Type, Trc_Mode, Ext_trg, Interval_t As String Dim Trc_Cal, Trc_num, MM_mod As String ' ' Storing value to variables ' File_name = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B1") Date_time = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B2") If Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A4") = "Trace" Then Start_Wl = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B7") Stop_Wl = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B8") Value_Sw = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A9") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B9") OptATT_Sw = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A10") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B10") RBW = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A11") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B11") Act_RBW = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A12") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B12") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("C12") VBW = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A13") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B13") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("D13") 'VB_Val = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B12") Avr_Sw = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A14") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B14") Smooth_Sw = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A15") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B15") Smpl_Num = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A16") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B16") Smple_Cnt = Val(Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B17")) Trc_Type = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A18") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B18") Trc_Mode = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A19") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B19") Trc_Cal = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B20") & " - " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B21") D_Range_SW = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A22") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B22") Ext_trg = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A23") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B23")

Page 308: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix G Excel Macro

G-4

Interval_t = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A24") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B24") MM_mod = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A25") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B25") Trc_num = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A4") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B4") Set FoundCell = Cells.Find(What:="Level(?)") Row_shift = FoundCell.Row 'MsgBox "Level(?) is row " & FoundCell.Row & ".", vbInformation Data_Area = "A" & LTrim(Str(Row_shift + 1)) & _ ":B" & LTrim(Str(Row_shift + Smple_Cnt)) Else Start_Wl = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B6") Stop_Wl = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B7") Value_Sw = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A8") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B8") OptATT_Sw = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A9") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B9") RBW = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A10") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B10") Act_RBW = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A11") & " " _ & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B11") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("C11") VBW = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A12") & " " _ & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B12") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("D12") 'VB_Val = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B12") Avr_Sw = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A13") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B13") Smooth_Sw = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A14") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B14") Smpl_Num = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A15") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B15") Smple_Cnt = Val(Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B16")) Trc_Type = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A17") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B17") Trc_Mode = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A18") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B18") Trc_Cal = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B19") & " - " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B20") D_Range_SW = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A21") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B21") Ext_trg = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A22") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B22") Interval_t = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A23") & " " & _ Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B23") MM_mod = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A24") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B24") Trc_num = Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A26") & " " & Sheets("Sheet1").Range("B26")

Page 309: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix G Excel Macro

G-5

Appendix G

Data_Area = "A29:B" & LTrim(Str(28 + Smple_Cnt)) End If ' ' Creating Graph ' ' Charts.Add ActiveChart.ChartType = xlXYScatterLinesNoMarkers ActiveChart.SetSourceData Source:=Sheets("Sheet1").Range(Data_Area), PlotBy _ :=xlColumns ActiveChart.Location Where:=xlLocationAsNewSheet ActiveChart.SeriesCollection(1).Name = Trc_num ActiveChart.PlotArea.Select Selection.Width = 600 Selection.Height = 370 Selection.Left = 50 Selection.Top = 55 With ActiveChart .HasTitle = True .ChartTitle.Characters.Text = File_name .Axes(xlCategory, xlPrimary).HasTitle = True .Axes(xlCategory, xlPrimary).AxisTitle.Characters.Text = "Wavelength [nm]" .Axes(xlValue, xlPrimary).HasTitle = True .Axes(xlValue, xlPrimary).AxisTitle.Characters.Text = "Power [mW]" End With With ActiveChart.Axes(xlCategory) .HasMajorGridlines = True .HasMinorGridlines = True .MinimumScale = Start_Wl .MaximumScale = Stop_Wl .MinorUnit = (Stop_Wl - Start_Wl) / 10 .MajorUnit = (Stop_Wl - Start_Wl) / 2 .Crosses = xlAutomatic .ReversePlotOrder = False .ScaleType = xlLinear .DisplayUnit = xlNone End With With ActiveChart.Axes(xlValue) .HasMajorGridlines = True .HasMinorGridlines = True .MinimumScale = 0 .MaximumScaleIsAuto = True .MinorUnit = .MaximumScale / 10

Page 310: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix G Excel Macro

G-6

.MajorUnit = .MaximumScale / 2 .Crosses = xlCustom .CrossesAt = 0 .ReversePlotOrder = False .ScaleType = xlLinear .DisplayUnit = xlNone End With ActiveChart.Axes(xlCategory).Select ActiveChart.PlotArea.Select With Selection.Border .ColorIndex = 16 .Weight = xlThin .LineStyle = xlContinuous End With Selection.Interior.ColorIndex = xlNone Application.CalculateFull ActiveChart.Axes(xlValue).MinorGridlines.Select With Selection.Border .ColorIndex = 57 .Weight = xlHairline .LineStyle = xlDot End With ActiveChart.Axes(xlCategory).MinorGridlines.Select With Selection.Border .ColorIndex = 57 .Weight = xlHairline .LineStyle = xlDot End With ' ' Insert Conditions of measurement ' ActiveChart.ChartArea.Select ' "Text 1" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(610, 10, 56, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = Date_time End With ' "Text 2"

Page 311: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix G Excel Macro

G-7

Appendix G

With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(10, 420, 56, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = RBW End With ' "Text 3" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(140, 420, 56, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = Act_RBW End With ' "Text 4" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(480, 420, 55, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = Value_Sw End With ' "Text 5" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(630, 420, 55, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = VBW End With ' "Text 6" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(10, 24, 54, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = Smpl_Num End With ' "Text 7" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(90, 24, 56, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = Avr_Sw End With ' "Text 8" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(190, 24, 55, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = Smooth_Sw End With

Page 312: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix G Excel Macro

G-8

' "Text 9" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(290, 24, 54, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = OptATT_Sw End With ' "Text 10" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(410, 24, 54, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = D_Range_SW End With ' "Text 11" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(530, 24, 56, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = Ext_trg End With ' "Text 12" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(620, 24, 54, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = Interval_t End With ' "Text 13" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(635, 220, 55, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = Trc_Type End With ' "Text 14" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(635, 260, 80, 30) .Select .AutoSize = False .Text = Trc_Mode End With If Trc_Type = "Trace Type Calculate" Then ' "Text 15"

Page 313: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix G Excel Macro

G-9

Appendix G

With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(635, 295, 54, 15) .Select .AutoSize = True .Text = Trc_Cal End With End If ' "Text 16" With ActiveChart.TextBoxes.Add(635, 320, 80, 30) .Select .AutoSize = False .Text = MM_mod End With End Sub

Page 314: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix G Excel Macro

G-10.

Figure G-3 Macro Performance Result

Page 315: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

H-1

Appendix H

Appendix H Bibliography

(1) IEC11801 Information technology - Generic cabling for customer

premises (2) IEC60747-5-3 Discrete semiconductor devices and integrated circuits

- Part 5-3: Optoelectronic devices - Measuring methods (3) IEC60793-1-44 Optical fibres - Part 1-44: Measurement methods and

test procedures - Cut-off wavelength (4) IEC60793-1-48 Optical fibres - Part 1-48: Measurement methods and

test procedures - Polarization mode dispersion (5) IEC60825-1 Safety of laser products. Part 1: Equipment

classification, requirements and user's guide (6) IEC61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for

measurement, control, and laboratory use - Part 1:General requirements

(7) IEC61280-1-3 Fibre optic communication subsystem basic test procedures - Part 1-3: Test procedures for general communication subsystems - Central wavelength and spectral width measurement

(8) IEC61280-2-9 Fibre optic communication subsystem test procedures - Part 2-9: Digital systems - Optical signal-to-noise ratio measurement for dense wavelength-division multiplexed systems

(9) IEC61280-4-4 Fibre optic communication subsystem test procedures - Part 4-4: Cable plants and links - Polarization mode dispersion measurement for installed links

(10) IEC61290-1-1 Optical amplifiers - Test methods - Part 1-1: Power and gain parameters - Optical spectrum analyzer method

(11) IEC61290-3-1 Optical amplifiers - Test methods - Part 3-1: Noise figure parameters - Optical spectrum analyzer method

(12) IEC61290-10-1 Optical amplifiers - Test methods - Part 10-1: Multichannel parameters - Pulse method using an optical switch and optical spectrum analyzer

(13) IEC61290-10-4 Optical amplifiers - Test methods - Part 10-4: Multichannel parameters – Interpolated source subtraction method using an optical spectrum analyzer

(14) IEC62007-2 Semiconductor optoelectronic devices for fibre optic system applications - Part 2: Measuring methods

(15) IEC62129 Calibration of optical spectrum analyzers (16) IEC62150-2 Fibre optic active components and devices - Test and

measurement procedures - Part 2: ATM-PON transceivers

Page 316: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Appendix H Bibliography

H-2.

(17) ISO31-0 Quantities and units - Part0 : General principles (18) ISO31-6 Quantities and units. Light and related electromagnetic

radiations (19) ITU-T G.651.1 Characteristics of a 50/125 μm multimode graded

index optical fibre cable for the optical access network (20) ITU-T G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fibre and cable (21) ITU-T G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM

frequency grid (22) ITU-T G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM

wavelength grid (23) ITU-T G.697 Optical monitoring for dense wavelength division

multiplex systems (24) Anritsu Corporation Optical Amplifier (EDFA) Characteristics

Evaluation https://www.anritsu.com/en-us/test-measurement/support/downloads/application-notes/dwl009208

Page 317: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Index

Index-1

Index

References are to page numbers.

Symbol and Numbers

∑ ΣPower .................................................. 5-23, 5-37

μ µW .................................................................... 1-3

1 1st Peak Marker ............................................ 5-14 1st Peak Wavelength .................................... 5-14

A Abbreviations ................................................. 1-13 About Eco label ............................................... xxii Accuracy ........................................................... 1-7 Active Trace ................................................... 4-24 Act-Res ........................................................... 4-10 Actual Resolution Calculation Method ........ 5-80 Adjusting Optical System ............................... 3-4 Analysis ................................................... 4-13, B-2 Analyzing Waveform ..................................... 4-13 Anritsu Warranty ............................................... xi Application Parts ............................................. A-8 Arrow key ....................................................... 3-12 ASE Fitting .................................................... 5-48 ASE Lvl/(Res)ASE Lvl/(Res) ......................... 5-47 Auto Align ........................................................ 3-4 Auto Cal(Init) .................................................. 3-7 Auto Measure ................................................ 3-13 Auto Offset ....................................................... 3-7 Automatic measurement............................... 3-13

B Beep Sound Setting ......................................... 6-5

C Cal .................................................................... B-9 Calculation ..................................................... 4-25 Calculation Method ....................................... 5-28 Calculation using polarization nulling method

.................................................................... 5-66 Calibrating Before Measurement ................... 3-2

Calibrating Resolution .................................... 3-9 Calibrating Wavelength .................................. 3-5 Calibration ................................................ 1-7, 7-2 Cautions on Handling Optical Fiber Cables 2-11 Cautions on Storage ...................................... 7-15 CE Conformity Marking ............................... xviii Center ...................................................... 3-14, 4-2 Center Offset .................................................. 5-43 CH Lvl ............................................................ 5-86 CH Wl ............................................................. 5-86 Changing Data Capturing Method ................. 4-7 Changing Measurement Mode ..................... 4-27 Changing Resolution ..................................... 3-14 Changing Scale .............................................. 3-15 Changing Waveform Memory Settings and

Calculation between Memories ................. 4-22 Changing Wavelength ................................... 3-14 Channel Parameter .............................. 5-68, 5-71

S.Level ........................................................ 5-72 Search Threshold ....................................... 5-72 Wavelength ................................................. 5-72

Checking Instrument Data ............................. 6-7 Cleaning the Ferrule End Surface ............... 7-10 Cleaning the Optical Adapter ....................... 7-11 Cleaning the Optical Fiber Cable Ferrule End

Surface ........................................................ 7-12 Color Setting .................................................... 6-4 Config ............................................................... B-9 Configuring Storage Media ........................... 2-32 Connecting Power Cord ................................... 2-8 Copy ................................................................ 3-25 Copy Setting .................................................... 6-4 Copy to HDD .................................................. 6-10 CSV ................................................................. 3-22

D Daily Maintenance ........................................ 7-14 dBm .................................................................. 1-3 Delete ............................................................. 6-10 Delta marker .................................................. 3-16 Description of Optical Spectrum Analyzer .... 1-2 Detection Type ............................. 5-22, 5-36, 5-72 Device ............................................................... 6-9

Page 318: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Index

Index-2

DFB-LD Test ............................................ 5-6, B-3 Diff Group Delay ........................................... 5-13 Dip Search ..................................................... 4-11 Display ........................................................... 4-25 Display Mode ................................................. 5-68 Displaying Level Peaks and Dips ................. 4-11 Displaying Windows Desktop ....................... 2-20 Disposal .......................................................... 7-16 Dynamic Range ............................. 1-10, 4-28, 7-7

E Envelope ........................................................ 4-17 Erase Overlap ................................................ 4-26 Erasing Analysis Results .............................. 4-21 Ethernet Setting .............................................. 6-2 Ext Trigger Delay .......................................... 4-28 Ext. Trigger Delay ......................................... 5-52 External Trigger .............................................. 1-7

F File Name Input dialog box .......................... 3-23 File Name Setting ........................................... 6-4 File Operation .................................................. 6-9 File Protect ...................................................... 6-9 File Selection Dialog box ............................... 3-26 File Type Setting ............................................. 6-4 Fitting Span ................................................... 5-50 Focus Change ................................................ 6-11 FP-LD Test ............................................... 5-9, B-3 Front Panel ...................................................... 2-5

G Gain Slope ...................................................... 5-67 Gain Variation ...................................... 5-17, 5-67 Gain(dB) Calculation Method ....................... 5-64 Gauss Fitting ................................................. 5-48 Gaussian distribution function..................... 4-19 General Notes on Cleaning ........................... 7-12 Glossary ........................................................... 1-7 GPIB Setting ................................................... 6-2 Graph ............................................................. 4-26

I Image.............................................................. 3-22 Labels on Product ............................................ viii

Initializing Measurement Conditions .......... 3-27 Inputting Data ............................................... 3-12 Inputting Offset ............................................. 3-10 Inputting Title to Waveform Data ............... 4-31 Installation ...................................................... 2-3 Intended Use .................................................... 1-6 Interface Setting .............................................. 6-2 Interval Time ................................................. 4-29 ISS Method .................................................... 5-83

Advanced .................................................... 5-68 Advanced Calculation Method .................. 5-79 IEC .............................................................. 5-68 IEC Calculation Method ............................ 5-79 Off ............................................................... 5-68 Off Calculation Method ............................. 5-80

K Keypad ........................................................... 3-12

L Laser Radiation Markings .............................. viii Laser Safety Classifications ............................ vii Last Page .............................................. 5-31, 5-85 Last Peak Marker .......................................... 5-14 Last Peak Wavelength .................................. 5-14 LD Module Test ..................................... 5-45, B-5 LED Test ................................................ 5-12, B-3 Level Accuracy ................................................. 7-6 Level marker .................................................. 3-16 Level Offset .................................................... 3-10 Level Scale ............................................... 4-5, B-1 Light Source for waveform calibration .......... 2-2 Linear Level ..................................................... 4-6 Local ............................................................... 3-28 Log(/div) ........................................................... 4-5 Log(/div.) ........................................................ 3-15

M Managing Files ................................................ 6-9 Marker ............................................................ B-10 Marker Select ................................................ 3-20 Masked Span ................................................. 5-50 Max Hold ........................................................ 4-24 Mean Fitting .................................................. 5-49

Page 319: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Index

Index-3

Index

Measure Mode ........................................ 4-27, B-9 Measured Level Range .................................... 1-9 Measuring DFB-LD ......................................... 5-3 Measuring FP-LD ............................................ 5-7 Measuring Laser Diode Modules .................. 5-33 Measuring LED ............................................. 5-10 Measuring Optical Amplifier ........................ 5-47

(Wavelength Division Multiplex) .............. 5-67 Calculation Method ................................... 5-64 Polarization Nulling Method .................... 5-56 Pulse Method ............................................. 5-58 Spectrum Division Methods ...................... 5-54

Measuring PMD ............................................ 5-13 Measuring the Optical Amplifier (Wavelength

Division Multiplex) Calculation Method ................................... 5-79

Measuring WDM ........................................... 5-17 Min Hold ........................................................ 4-24 MkrValue Wl/Freq .......................................... 4-3 MM Mode ....................................................... 4-29 Mode Cpl Factor ............................................ 5-14 Mode Offset .................................................... 5-43 Mode Spacing ................................................... 5-7 Mode( n dB)...................................................... 5-7 Move to USB .................................................... 6-9 Multi Peak ..................................................... 5-19 Multimode Fiber Mode .................................. 4-29 mW ................................................................... 1-3

N ndB Loss ........................................................ 4-16 ndB Width ............................................... 5-4, 5-35 Next Page .............................................. 5-31, 5-85 NF (dB) Calculation Method ........................ 5-64 NF Cal ............................................................ 5-50 NF Select ........................................................ 5-50 nm ..................................................................... 1-3 Noise Factor NF (dB) Calculation Method .. 5-81 Noise Measureing Point ....................... 5-28, 5-44 Noise Parameter ................................... 5-24, 5-39

Area ................................................... 5-26, 5-41 Area Type .......................................... 5-27, 5-41 Channel ............................................. 5-27, 5-42 Detection Type ........................................... 5-39

Detection Type ........................................... 5-25 Fitting Curve ..................................... 5-26, 5-41 Fitting Curve Display ....................... 5-27, 5-41 Noise BW .................................................... 5-25 Noise Span.................................................. 5-39 Normalization ............................................ 5-25 Point................................................... 5-26, 5-41 User Specify ...................................... 5-27, 5-42

Noise Position ....................................... 5-25, 5-40 Normal ........................................................... 4-26 Normalize ....................................................... 4-26 nW .................................................................... 1-3

O O.BPF BW ............................................. 5-51, 5-78 O.BPF Lvl Cal ....................................... 5-50, 5-78 Opt .AMP Multi Test ....................................... B-7 Opt .AMP Test ................................................. B-6 Opt Amp Test Parameter ..................... 5-68, 5-74

Actual Resolution ....................................... 5-77 Area ............................................................ 5-76 Detection Type ........................................... 5-75 Fitting Curve .............................................. 5-76 Fitting Display ........................................... 5-76 Fitting Span Mode ..................................... 5-76 Initial .......................................................... 5-77 Masked Span .............................................. 5-76 Measured .................................................... 5-77 NF Cal ........................................................ 5-78 NF Select .................................................... 5-77 Pin Loss(Offset) .......................................... 5-78 Point............................................................ 5-77 Pout Loss(Offset) ........................................ 5-78 S-ASE.......................................................... 5-77 Total ............................................................ 5-77

Opt.Att ............................................................. 4-6 Optical Connector/Optical Adapter Cleaning

..................................................................... 7-10 Optical Output ............................................... 4-32 Option Info ....................................................... 6-7 Others ............................................ 4-31, 4-32, B-9 Overlap ........................................................... 4-24

Page 320: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Index

Index-4

P panel lock ....................................................... 3-28 Parameter Dialog Box Input Range

Parameter Dialog Box Input Range ......... 5-49 Peak Count ........................................... 5-14, 5-86 Peak Search .......................................... 3-20, 4-11 Peak/Dip Search ..................................... 4-11, B-1 Peak->Center ................................................. 3-14 Peak->Ref Lvl ................................................ 3-15 Peaks Targeted for Analysis ......................... 5-72 Performance Test ............................................ 7-3 Pin Loss .......................................................... 5-51 PK Lvl ............................................................ 5-86 PkDens(/1nm) ................................................ 5-10 PLZN Nulling ................................................ 5-48 PLZN NullingPLZN Nulling ........................ 5-56 PMD Test ................................................ 5-15, B-3 Point average ................................................... 4-7 Pol Loss .......................................................... 5-51 Pout Loss ........................................................ 5-51 Power Monitor ............................................... 4-29 Power Requirements ....................................... 2-7 Precautions at Measurement ....................... 2-13 Pulse Method ........................................ 5-48, 5-59 pW .................................................................... 1-3

R RCM Conformity Marking ............................... xxi Reading Data from File................................. 3-26 Rear Panel ....................................................... 2-6 Recall ..................................................... 3-26, 3-27 Recommended storage conditions ................ 7-15 Ref .................................................................. 3-15 Ref Level .......................................................... 4-6 Relationship between VBW, Sweep Time and

Minimum Optical Reception ....................... E-1 Relative .......................................................... 5-20 Releasing Panel Lock .................................... 3-28 Remote Control .............................................. 1-12 Repackaging .................................................. 7-16 Repeat ............................................................ 3-13 Repeat measurement .................................... 3-13 Replacement of Optical Connector ................. 7-8 Res ........................................................... 3-14, 4-8

Res Cal .............................................................. 3-9 Res/VBW/Avg ........................................... 4-8, B-1 Resetting System Data ................................... 6-8 Resolution ...................................................... 1-11 Response of the Panel Keys and Mouse ........ D-3 Response of the rotary knob and mouse ....... D-3 Responses of the Panel Keys and Keyboard . D-1 Ripple ............................................................. 5-86 RMS ................................................................ 4-18 Rotary knob .................................................... 3-12

S Sampling Point ................................................ 4-8 S-ASE ............................................................. 5-50 Save ................................................................ 3-23 Saving Measurement Conditions and Waveform

Data ............................................................ 3-23 Saving Screens ............................................... 3-25 Screen Names ................................................ 2-33 Search Resolution ................................... 5-4, 5-35 Setting and Checking Instrument Data ........ 6-2 Setting Control Panel ........................... 2-20, 2-22 Setting Interfaces and File Operating

Environment ................................................ 6-2 Setting Level Display ...................................... 4-5 Signal Parameter ................................. 5-21, 5-36

Level .................................................. 5-23, 5-37 S.Level ........................................................ 5-22 Wavelength ........................................ 5-22, 5-36

Signal Subject to Analysis ............................ 5-91 Single .............................................................. 3-13 Single measurement ...................................... 3-13 Slice Level ............................................... 5-4, 5-33 Smooth ............................................................. 4-9 SMSR .............................................................. 4-15 SMSR Parameter

2nd Peak ..................................................... 5-35 Left .............................................................. 5-35 Right ........................................................... 5-35

SNR ................................................................ 5-19 SNR(/*.*nm) ................................................... 5-45 SNR(Res ***nm) ............................................ 5-44 Software Install ............................................. 6-11 Software License Install ............................... 6-12

Page 321: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Index

Index-5

Index

Software License View .................................... 6-7 Spacing ........................................................... 5-86 Span ........................................................ 3-14, 4-2 Specifications ................................................... A-1 Spect Dev OffSpect Dev Off .......................... 5-55 Spect Dev OnSpect Dev On .......................... 5-54 Spect Div Off ........................................... 5-4, 5-47 Spect Div On .................................................. 5-48 Spectrum Division Calculation Method ....... 5-66 Spectrum Power ............................................ 4-20 Start ................................................................. 4-3 Stop ......................................................... 3-13, 4-3 Stop Band ...................................................... 5-43 Storage Mode ................................................. 4-24 Sweep average ................................................. 4-7 Sweep Speed .................................................... 1-7 System Info ............................................... 6-7, 6-8 System Info View............................................. 6-7 System Information Save ............................... 6-8 System Reset ................................................... 6-8 System Setting ................................................ 6-5

T Table ............................................. 5-20, 5-70, 5-89 Terminate Setting ........................................... 6-2 Test Parameter

Ripple ......................................................... 5-93 Test Parameter .............................................. 5-90

BW/Pass Band ........................................... 5-92 Detection Type ........................................... 5-91 Level ........................................................... 5-93 S.Level ........................................................ 5-91 Search Threshold ....................................... 5-91 Threshold Wavelength ............................... 5-92

Threshold ....................................................... 4-14 THz ................................................................... 1-3 Title ................................................................ 4-31 Title Input Dialog box ................................... 4-31 Total ............................................................... 5-50 Total Power ............................................. 5-7, 5-10 Trace........................................................ 4-22, B-2 Trace & Table ....................................... 5-69, 5-88 Trace marker ................................................. 3-16 Trace Type ..................................................... 4-24

Transporting .................................................. 7-16 Troubleshooting ............................................. 7-17 Turning Power On/Off ................................... 2-17

U Unpacking ........................................................ 2-2 Updating Software ........................................ 6-11 Using external display .................................. 2-23 Using Light Source Option ........................... 4-32 Using Wavelength and Level Markers ........ 3-20 Using Zone Markers ...................................... 3-21

V Value in Air/Vac .............................................. 4-4 VBW .......................................................... 1-7, 4-8

W Waveform Analysis ........................................ 1-10 Waveform Calculation ................................... 1-10 Wavelength .............................................. 4-2, B-1 Wavelength Accuracy ...................................... 7-5 Wavelength marker ....................................... 3-16 Wavelength Multiplexed Light ..................... 5-61 Wavelength-related Settings .......................... 4-2 WDM Analysis Target Peaks ........................ 5-22 WDM Filter ...................................................... B-8 WDM Measure ...................................... 5-48, 5-61 WDM Test .............................................. 5-31, B-4 Windows Security Measures ......................... 2-25 Wl Cal(Ext) ...................................................... 3-5 Wl Cal(Ref) ....................................................... 3-6 Wl Offset ........................................................ 3-10 Write to ................................................. 5-52, 5-68

X XML ................................................................ 3-22

Z Zero Cal ............................................................ 3-8 Zone marker ................................................... 3-16 Zone Marker ........................................ 3-21, B-10

Page 322: MS9740B Optical Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual

Index

Index-6.